Correct ld Makefile dependendcy for or1k
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
b90efa5b 3@c Copyright (C) 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 4@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 5@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
6@include configdoc.texi
7@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 8@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 9@c man end
252b5132
RH
10
11@c @smallbook
12
ff5dcc92
SC
13@macro gcctabopt{body}
14@code{\body\}
15@end macro
16
0285c67d
NC
17@c man begin NAME
18@ifset man
19@c Configure for the generation of man pages
20@set UsesEnvVars
21@set GENERIC
0285c67d 22@set ARM
ac145307 23@set C6X
49fa1e15 24@set H8300
0285c67d 25@set HPPA
0285c67d 26@set I960
0285c67d 27@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 28@set M68K
833794fc 29@set MIPS
3c3bdf30 30@set MMIX
2469cfa2 31@set MSP430
35c08157 32@set NDS32
78058a5e 33@set NIOSII
2a60a7a8
AM
34@set POWERPC
35@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15
AM
36@set Renesas
37@set SPU
38@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 39@set WIN32
e0001a05 40@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
41@end ifset
42@c man end
43
9160ea82
AM
44@ifnottex
45@dircategory Software development
46@direntry
252b5132 47* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
9160ea82
AM
48@end direntry
49@end ifnottex
252b5132 50
0e9517a9 51@copying
e49e529d
JM
52This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
53@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
54@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
55@end ifset
56version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 57
b90efa5b 58Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 59
cf055d54 60Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 61under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
62or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 65section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 66@end copying
252b5132
RH
67@iftex
68@finalout
69@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 70@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 71@titlepage
71ba23f6 72@title The GNU linker
252b5132 73@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
74@subtitle @code{ld}
75@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77@end ifset
252b5132
RH
78@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79@author Steve Chamberlain
80@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
81@page
82
83@tex
84{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
85\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 87\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
88\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89}
90\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91@end tex
92
93@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 94@c man begin COPYRIGHT
b90efa5b 95Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 96
0285c67d 97Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 98under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
99or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
100with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
101Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 102section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 103@c man end
252b5132 104
252b5132
RH
105@end titlepage
106@end iftex
4ecceb71 107@contents
252b5132
RH
108@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
109
84ec0e6d 110@ifnottex
252b5132 111@node Top
71ba23f6 112@top LD
e49e529d
JM
113This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
114@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
115@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
116@end ifset
117version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 118
cf055d54 119This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
120Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
121in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 122
252b5132
RH
123@menu
124* Overview:: Overview
125* Invocation:: Invocation
126* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
127@ifset GENERIC
128* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
129@end ifset
130@ifclear GENERIC
131@ifset H8300
132* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
133@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
134@ifset Renesas
135* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
136@end ifset
137@ifset I960
138* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
139@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
140@ifset ARM
141* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
142@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
143@ifset M68HC11
144* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
145@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
146@ifset HPPA
147* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
148@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
149@ifset M68K
150* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
151@end ifset
833794fc
MR
152@ifset MIPS
153* MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
154@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
155@ifset POWERPC
156* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
157@end ifset
158@ifset POWERPC64
159* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
160@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
161@ifset SPU
162* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
163@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
164@ifset TICOFF
165* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
166@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
167@ifset WIN32
168* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
169@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
170@ifset XTENSA
171* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
172@end ifset
252b5132
RH
173@end ifclear
174@ifclear SingleFormat
175* BFD:: BFD
176@end ifclear
177@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
178
179* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
180* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 181* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 182* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 183@end menu
84ec0e6d 184@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
185
186@node Overview
187@chapter Overview
188
189@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
190@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 191
0879a67a 192@ifset man
0285c67d 193@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 194ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
195@c man end
196
197@c man begin SEEALSO
198ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
199the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
200@file{ld}.
201@c man end
202@end ifset
203
204@c man begin DESCRIPTION
205
ff5dcc92 206@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 207their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 208compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 209
ff5dcc92 210@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
211a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
212to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
213
0285c67d
NC
214@ifset man
215@c For the man only
ece2d90e 216This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
217@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
218language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
219@end ifset
220
252b5132 221@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
222This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
223to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
224write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
225@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
226available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
227@end ifclear
228
229Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
230linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
231execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 232@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
233(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
234
0285c67d
NC
235@c man end
236
252b5132
RH
237@node Invocation
238@chapter Invocation
239
0285c67d
NC
240@c man begin DESCRIPTION
241
ff5dcc92 242The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
243and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
244you have many choices to control its behavior.
245
0285c67d
NC
246@c man end
247
252b5132
RH
248@ifset UsesEnvVars
249@menu
250* Options:: Command Line Options
251* Environment:: Environment Variables
252@end menu
253
254@node Options
255@section Command Line Options
256@end ifset
257
258@cindex command line
259@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
260
261@c man begin OPTIONS
262
252b5132
RH
263The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
264practice few of them are used in any particular context.
265@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 266For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
267object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
268link a file @code{hello.o}:
269
270@smallexample
271ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
272@end smallexample
273
ff5dcc92 274This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
275result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
276the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
277directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
278
ff5dcc92 279Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
280point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
281as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
282which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
283files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
284different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
285occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
286option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
287noted in the descriptions below.
288
289@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
290Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
291together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
292options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
293an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
294
295Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
296specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
297and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
298are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
299message @samp{No input files}.
300
36f63dca 301If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
302assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
303augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
304linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
305permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
306or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
307@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
308script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
309extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
310to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
311the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
312
313For options whose names are a single letter,
314option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
315whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
316option that requires them.
317
318For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 319precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 320@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 321this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 322only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
323@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
324name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
325output.
326
327Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
328option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
329immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
330@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
331Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
332accepted.
252b5132 333
36f63dca
NC
334Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
335(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
336prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
337compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
338
339@smallexample
2509a395 340 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
341@end smallexample
342
343This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
344silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
345may also arise when passing options that require values through a
346driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
347a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
348and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
349the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
350
351@smallexample
352 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
353@end smallexample
4e53152f
NC
354
355Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
356linker:
357
ff5dcc92 358@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 359@include at-file.texi
dff70155 360
2509a395
SL
361@kindex -a @var{keyword}
362@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
363This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
364argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
365@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
366@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
367to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
368
7ee314fa
AM
369@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
370@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
372@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
373specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
374will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
375finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
9d5777a3 376it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
7ee314fa 377This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
9d5777a3 378interface.
7ee314fa 379
252b5132
RH
380@ifset I960
381@cindex architectures
2509a395
SL
382@kindex -A @var{arch}
383@item -A @var{architecture}
252b5132
RH
384@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
385@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
386In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
387Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
388@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
389the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 390archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
391family}, for details.
392
ff5dcc92 393Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
394other architecture families.
395@end ifset
396
397@ifclear SingleFormat
398@cindex binary input format
399@kindex -b @var{format}
400@kindex --format=@var{format}
401@cindex input format
402@cindex input format
403@item -b @var{input-format}
404@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
405@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
406file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 407@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 408that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 409configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 410to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
411default input format the most usual format on each machine.
412@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
413supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
414formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
415@xref{BFD}.
416
417You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
418binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
419linking object files of different formats), by including
420@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 421particular format.
252b5132
RH
422
423The default format is taken from the environment variable
424@code{GNUTARGET}.
425@ifset UsesEnvVars
426@xref{Environment}.
427@end ifset
428You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
429@code{TARGET};
430@ifclear man
431see @ref{Format Commands}.
432@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
433@end ifclear
434
435@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
436@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
437@cindex compatibility, MRI
438@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
439@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 440For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 441files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
442@ifclear man
443@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
444@end ifclear
445@ifset man
446the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
447@end ifset
448Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 449the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
450scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
451If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
452specified by any @samp{-L} options.
453
454@cindex common allocation
455@kindex -d
456@kindex -dc
457@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 458@item -d
252b5132
RH
459@itemx -dc
460@itemx -dp
461These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
462compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
463even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
464script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
465@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
466
7ee314fa
AM
467@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
468@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
469@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
470@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
471Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
472@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
473specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
474will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
475option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
9d5777a3 476The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
7ee314fa 477
252b5132
RH
478@cindex entry point, from command line
479@kindex -e @var{entry}
480@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 481@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
482@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
483Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
484program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
485named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
486and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
487base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
488@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
489and other ways of specifying the entry point.
490
b58f81ae
DJ
491@kindex --exclude-libs
492@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
493Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 494exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
495@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
496automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
497port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
498explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
499option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
500be treated as hidden.
501
e1c37eb5
DK
502@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
503@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
504Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
505should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
506into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
507may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
508used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
509the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
510match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
511command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
512of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
513regardless of this option.
514
252b5132
RH
515@cindex dynamic symbol table
516@kindex -E
517@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 518@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
519@item -E
520@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
521@itemx --no-export-dynamic
522When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
523option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
524all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
525set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
526
527If you do not use either of these options (or use the
528@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
529dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
530referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
531
532If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
533back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
534dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
535linking the program itself.
536
55255dae 537You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 538be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 539See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 540
8b747e1a
DK
541Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
542support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
543the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
544
36f63dca 545@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
546@cindex big-endian objects
547@cindex endianness
548@kindex -EB
549@item -EB
550Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
551
552@cindex little-endian objects
553@kindex -EL
554@item -EL
555Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 556@end ifclear
252b5132 557
2509a395
SL
558@kindex -f @var{name}
559@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
560@item -f @var{name}
561@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
562When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
563to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
564table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
565symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
566
567If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
568run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
569the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
570first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
571@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
572in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
573Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
574implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
575machine specific performance.
576
577This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
578will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
579
2509a395
SL
580@kindex -F @var{name}
581@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 582@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 583@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
584When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
585the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
586of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
587on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
588
589If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
590run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
591dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
592filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
593found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
594used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
595@var{name}.
596
ff5dcc92 597Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 598toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
599object files.
600@ifclear SingleFormat
601The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 602@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 603@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
604environment variable.
605@end ifclear
606The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
607creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 608
3dbf70a2 609@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
610@kindex -fini=@var{name}
611@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
612When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
613executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
614address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
615the function to call.
616
252b5132
RH
617@kindex -g
618@item -g
619Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
620
2509a395
SL
621@kindex -G @var{value}
622@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 623@cindex object size
2509a395 624@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
625@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
626Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
627@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
e8044f35 628MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
252b5132
RH
629sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
630
631@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 632@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 633@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 634@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
635@itemx -soname=@var{name}
636When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
637the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
638which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
639linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
640field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
641
642@kindex -i
643@cindex incremental link
644@item -i
645Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
646
3dbf70a2 647@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
648@kindex -init=@var{name}
649@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
650When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
651executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
652of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
653function to call.
654
252b5132 655@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 656@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 657@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 658@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
659@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
660Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
661list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
662If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 663will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 664will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 665
ff5dcc92 666On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
667files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
668and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
669called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
670@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
671indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
672to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
673@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
674
675The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
676specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
677was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
678command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
679archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
680the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
681
ff5dcc92 682See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
683archives multiple times.
684
685You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
686
687@ifset GENERIC
688This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 689if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
690behaviour of the AIX linker.
691@end ifset
692
693@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 694@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 695@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 696@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 697@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
698Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
699for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
700option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
701in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
702on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 703@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
704order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
705how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
706option is specified.
252b5132 707
9c8ebd6a 708If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
b3b9c41d
HPN
709by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the @samp{--sysroot} option, or
710specified when the linker is configured.
9c8ebd6a 711
252b5132
RH
712@ifset UsesEnvVars
713The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 714@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
715some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
716@end ifset
717
718The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
719@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
720at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
721
722@cindex emulation
723@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 724@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
725Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
726emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
727
728If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
729@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
730
731Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
732configured.
733
734@cindex link map
735@kindex -M
736@kindex --print-map
737@item -M
738@itemx --print-map
739Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
740information about the link, including the following:
741
742@itemize @bullet
743@item
3b83e13a 744Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
745@item
746How common symbols are allocated.
747@item
748All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
749which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
750@item
751The values assigned to symbols.
752
753Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
754involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
755have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
756linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
757of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
758the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
759linker script containing:
760
761@smallexample
762 foo = 1
763 foo = foo * 4
764 foo = foo + 8
765@end smallexample
766
767will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
768option is used:
769
770@smallexample
771 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
772 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
773 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
774@end smallexample
775
776See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
777scripts.
252b5132
RH
778@end itemize
779
780@kindex -n
781@cindex read-only text
782@cindex NMAGIC
783@kindex --nmagic
784@item -n
785@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
786Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
787libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
788mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
789
790@kindex -N
791@kindex --omagic
792@cindex read/write from cmd line
793@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 794@item -N
252b5132
RH
795@itemx --omagic
796Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
797not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
798libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
799mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
800is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
801specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
802
803@kindex --no-omagic
804@cindex OMAGIC
805@item --no-omagic
806This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
807sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
808be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
809shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
810
811@kindex -o @var{output}
812@kindex --output=@var{output}
813@cindex naming the output file
814@item -o @var{output}
815@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 816Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
817option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
818script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
819
820@kindex -O @var{level}
821@cindex generating optimized output
822@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 823If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 824the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
825should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
826option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
827the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
828no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
829of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 830
26278bb8
UD
831@kindex --push-state
832@cindex push state governing input file handling
833@item --push-state
834The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
835flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
836restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
837
838The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
839@option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
840@option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
841@option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
842@option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
843@option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
844
845One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
846used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
847listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
848something as follows:
849
850@smallexample
851-Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
852@end smallexample
853
854@kindex --pop-state
855@cindex pop state governing input file handling
856Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
857flags governing input file handling.
858
a712da20
NC
859@kindex -q
860@kindex --emit-relocs
861@cindex retain relocations in final executable
862@item -q
863@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 864Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
865Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
866order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
867in larger executables.
868
dbab7a7b
NC
869This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
870
4f471f39
RS
871@kindex --force-dynamic
872@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
873@item --force-dynamic
874Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
875to VxWorks targets.
876
252b5132
RH
877@cindex partial link
878@cindex relocatable output
879@kindex -r
1049f94e 880@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 881@item -r
1049f94e 882@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 883Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 884turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
885linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
886magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
887@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 888@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
889If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
890linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
891constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
892
62bf86b4
HPN
893When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
894partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
895relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
896example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
897with input files in other formats at all.
898
252b5132
RH
899This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
900
901@kindex -R @var{file}
902@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
903@cindex symbol-only input
904@item -R @var{filename}
905@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
906Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
907relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
908to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
909programs. You may use this option more than once.
910
ff5dcc92 911For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 912followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 913the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
914
915@kindex -s
916@kindex --strip-all
917@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 918@item -s
252b5132
RH
919@itemx --strip-all
920Omit all symbol information from the output file.
921
922@kindex -S
923@kindex --strip-debug
924@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 925@item -S
252b5132
RH
926@itemx --strip-debug
927Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
928
929@kindex -t
930@kindex --trace
931@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 932@item -t
252b5132 933@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 934Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
935
936@kindex -T @var{script}
937@kindex --script=@var{script}
938@cindex script files
939@item -T @var{scriptfile}
940@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
941Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 942@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 943@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
944output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
945the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
946specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
947options accumulate.
252b5132 948
14be8564
L
949@kindex -dT @var{script}
950@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
951@cindex script files
952@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
953@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
954Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
955
956This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
957processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
958command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
959@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
960behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
961command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
962the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
963@samp{gcc}).
964
252b5132
RH
965@kindex -u @var{symbol}
966@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
967@cindex undefined symbol
968@item -u @var{symbol}
969@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
970Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
971symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
972modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
973different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
974option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
975
976@kindex -Ur
977@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 978@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
979For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
980@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 981turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
982@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
983It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
984with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
985be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
986@samp{-r} for the others.
987
577a0623
AM
988@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
989@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
990Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
991@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
992missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
993specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
994multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
995input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
996in a linker script.
a854a4a7 997
252b5132
RH
998@kindex -v
999@kindex -V
1000@kindex --version
1001@cindex version
1002@item -v
1003@itemx --version
1004@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 1005Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
1006lists the supported emulations.
1007
1008@kindex -x
1009@kindex --discard-all
1010@cindex deleting local symbols
1011@item -x
1012@itemx --discard-all
1013Delete all local symbols.
1014
1015@kindex -X
1016@kindex --discard-locals
1017@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 1018@item -X
252b5132 1019@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
1020Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1021system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1022or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
1023
1024@kindex -y @var{symbol}
1025@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1026@cindex symbol tracing
1027@item -y @var{symbol}
1028@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1029Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1030option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1031to prepend an underscore.
1032
1033This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1034don't know where the reference is coming from.
1035
1036@kindex -Y @var{path}
1037@item -Y @var{path}
1038Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1039for Solaris compatibility.
1040
1041@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1042@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1043The recognized keywords are:
1044@table @samp
1045
1046@item combreloc
1047Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1048lookup caching possible.
1049
1050@item defs
560e09e9 1051Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
07f3b6ad 1052shared libraries are still allowed.
cd6d6c15 1053
6aa29e7b
JJ
1054@item execstack
1055Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1056
b039ef04
L
1057@item global
1058This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1059the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1060of subsequently loaded libraries.
1061
cd6d6c15
NC
1062@item initfirst
1063This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1064It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1065before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1066the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1067the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1068objects.
1069
1070@item interpose
1071Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1072but the primary executable.
1073
5fa222e4
AM
1074@item lazy
1075When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1076dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1077the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1078Lazy binding is the default.
1079
cd6d6c15
NC
1080@item loadfltr
1081Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1082runtime.
1083
1084@item muldefs
1085Allows multiple definitions.
1086
1087@item nocombreloc
1088Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1089
1090@item nocopyreloc
daf220f0
AM
1091Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1092defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
cd6d6c15
NC
1093
1094@item nodefaultlib
1095Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1096ignore any default library search paths.
1097
1098@item nodelete
1099Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1100
1101@item nodlopen
1102Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1103
1104@item nodump
1105Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1106
6aa29e7b
JJ
1107@item noexecstack
1108Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1109
8dfef1bd
L
1110@item text
1111Treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1112
1113@item notext
1114Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1115
1116@item textoff
1117Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1118
6aa29e7b
JJ
1119@item norelro
1120Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1121
cd6d6c15
NC
1122@item now
1123When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1124dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1125when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1126deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1127first called.
1128
1129@item origin
1130Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1131
6aa29e7b
JJ
1132@item relro
1133Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1134
24718e3b
L
1135@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1136Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1137
1138@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1139Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1140
04c3a755
NS
1141@item stack-size=@var{value}
1142Specify a stack size for in an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1143Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1144@code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1145
d258b828
IZ
1146@item bndplt
1147Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1148
889c2a67
L
1149@item noextern-protected-data
1150Don't treat protected data symbol as external when building shared
1151library. This option overrides linker backend default. It can be used
1152to workaround incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1153generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
1154module aren't visibile to the resulting shared library. Supported for
1155i386 and x86-64.
1156
cd6d6c15
NC
1157@end table
1158
ece2d90e 1159Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1160
1161@kindex -(
1162@cindex groups of archives
1163@item -( @var{archives} -)
1164@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1165The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1166either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1167
1168The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1169references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1170the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1171archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1172object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1173would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1174they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1175resolved.
1176
1177Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1178it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1179more archives.
1180
69da35b5
NC
1181@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1182@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1183@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1184@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1185Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1186recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1187and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1188the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1189behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1190so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1191restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1192
4a43e768
AM
1193@kindex --as-needed
1194@kindex --no-as-needed
1195@item --as-needed
1196@itemx --no-as-needed
1197This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1198on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1199the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1200on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31 1201needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
ffa9430d
AM
1202emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1203non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1240be6b
AM
1204the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1205non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
ffa9430d
AM
1206Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1207the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1208needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1209from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
4a43e768 1210
e56f61be
L
1211@kindex --add-needed
1212@kindex --no-add-needed
1213@item --add-needed
1214@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1215These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1216their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1217options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1218and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1219
252b5132
RH
1220@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1221@item -assert @var{keyword}
1222This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1223
1224@kindex -Bdynamic
1225@kindex -dy
1226@kindex -call_shared
1227@item -Bdynamic
1228@itemx -dy
1229@itemx -call_shared
1230Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1231for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1232default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1233for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1234multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1235@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1236
a1ab1d2a
UD
1237@kindex -Bgroup
1238@item -Bgroup
1239Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1240section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1241object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1242@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1243only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1244
252b5132
RH
1245@kindex -Bstatic
1246@kindex -dn
1247@kindex -non_shared
1248@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1249@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1250@itemx -dn
1251@itemx -non_shared
1252@itemx -static
1253Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1254platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1255variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1256may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1257library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1258option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1259option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1260shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1261references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1262libraries.
252b5132
RH
1263
1264@kindex -Bsymbolic
1265@item -Bsymbolic
1266When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1267definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1268for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1269within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1270platforms which support shared libraries.
1271
40b36307
L
1272@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1273@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1274When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1275symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
40b36307
L
1276This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1277libraries.
1278
55255dae
L
1279@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1280@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1281Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1282typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1283global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1284within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1285to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1286in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1287which support shared libraries.
1288
1289The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1290scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1291
40b36307
L
1292@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1293@item --dynamic-list-data
1294Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1295
1296@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1297@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1298Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1299is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1300
0b8a70d9
L
1301@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1302@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1303Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1304
252b5132
RH
1305@kindex --check-sections
1306@kindex --no-check-sections
1307@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1308@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1309Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1310been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1311perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1312suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1313allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1314restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1315Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1316force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1317option.
252b5132 1318
ddbb8a31
NC
1319@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1320@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1321@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1322@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
9d5777a3 1323This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
ddbb8a31 1324by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
08efffb8 1325command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
ddbb8a31 1326output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
08efffb8 1327input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
ddbb8a31 1328specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
08efffb8
MM
1329follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1330behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
ddbb8a31
NC
1331
1332This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
08efffb8
MM
1333libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1334mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1335their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1336required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1337the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1338dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
ddbb8a31
NC
1339symbols.
1340
252b5132
RH
1341@cindex cross reference table
1342@kindex --cref
1343@item --cref
1344Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1345generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1346Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1347
1348The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1349easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1350sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1351symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
049c1c8e
NC
1352definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1353where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1354symbol are listed.
252b5132 1355
4818e05f
AM
1356@cindex common allocation
1357@kindex --no-define-common
1358@item --no-define-common
1359This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1360The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1361@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1362
1363The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1364the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1365of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1366forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1367Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1368from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1369This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1370and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1371duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1372paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1373
252b5132 1374@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1375@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1376@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1377Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1378address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1379times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1380limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1381context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1382symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1383constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
66bc8739
AM
1384using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1385@emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1386equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
252b5132
RH
1387
1388@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1389@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1390@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1391@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1392@itemx --no-demangle
1393These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1394and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1395present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1396underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1397mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1398different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1399to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1400demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1401is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1402
1403@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1404@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1405@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1406@item -I@var{file}
1407@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1408Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1409generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1410linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1411doing.
1412
7ce691ae 1413@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1414@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1415@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1416@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1417Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1418with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1419
252b5132
RH
1420@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1421@item --force-exe-suffix
1422Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1423
1424If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1425@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1426the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1427option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1428Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1429it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1430
1431@kindex --gc-sections
1432@kindex --no-gc-sections
1433@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1434@item --gc-sections
1435@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1436Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1437targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761
NC
1438performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1439@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line.
252b5132 1440
d5465ba2
AM
1441@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1442examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1443symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1444command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1445referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1446libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1447referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1448the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1449relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1450
ac69cbc6 1451This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
9d5777a3 1452@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
ac69cbc6
TG
1453specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1454a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1455
c17d87de
NC
1456@kindex --print-gc-sections
1457@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1458@cindex garbage collection
1459@item --print-gc-sections
1460@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1461List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1462printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1463collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1464default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1465be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1466line.
1467
30824704
RM
1468@kindex --print-output-format
1469@cindex output format
1470@item --print-output-format
1471Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1472other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1473in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1474
3604cb1f
TG
1475@kindex --print-memory-usage
1476@cindex memory usage
1477@item --print-memory-usage
1478Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1479the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1480quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1481headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1482parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1483
1484@smallexample
1485Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1486 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1487 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1488@end smallexample
1489
252b5132
RH
1490@cindex help
1491@cindex usage
1492@kindex --help
1493@item --help
1494Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1495
ea20a7da
CC
1496@kindex --target-help
1497@item --target-help
1498Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1499
2509a395
SL
1500@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1501@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1502Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1503@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1504
1505@cindex memory usage
1506@kindex --no-keep-memory
1507@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1508@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1509symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1510instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1511necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1512while linking a large executable.
1513
1514@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1515@kindex -z defs
252b5132 1516@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1517@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1518Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1519is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1520The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1521behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1522libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1523
aa713662
L
1524@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1525@kindex -z muldefs
1526@item --allow-multiple-definition
1527@itemx -z muldefs
1528Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1529report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1530first definition will be used.
1531
b79e8c78 1532@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1533@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1534@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1535@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1536Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1537This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1538determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1539shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1540how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1541
903249d7
NC
1542The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1543referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1544an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1545a shared library.
1546
1547The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1548libraries specified at link time are that:
1549
1550@itemize @bullet
1551@item
1552A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1553that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1554resolvable at load time.
1555@item
1556There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1557symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1558
1559The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1560select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1561architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1562appropriate memset function.
1563@end itemize
b79e8c78 1564
31941635
L
1565@kindex --no-undefined-version
1566@item --no-undefined-version
1567Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1568it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1569will be issued instead.
1570
3e3b46e5
PB
1571@kindex --default-symver
1572@item --default-symver
1573Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1574exported symbols.
1575
1576@kindex --default-imported-symver
1577@item --default-imported-symver
1578Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1579imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1580
252b5132
RH
1581@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1582@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1583Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1584files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1585been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1586This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1587errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1588have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1589inappropriate.
1590
fe7929ce
AM
1591@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1592@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1593Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1594library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1595
252b5132
RH
1596@kindex --no-whole-archive
1597@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1598Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1599archive files.
1600
1601@cindex output file after errors
1602@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1603@item --noinhibit-exec
1604Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1605Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1606errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1607when it issues any error whatsoever.
1608
0a9c1c8e
CD
1609@kindex -nostdlib
1610@item -nostdlib
1611Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1612command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1613(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1614
252b5132 1615@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1616@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1617@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1618@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1619file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1620@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1621object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1622object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1623should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1624usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1625name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1626list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1627command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1628this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1629@end ifclear
1630
36af4a4e
JJ
1631@kindex -pie
1632@kindex --pic-executable
1633@item -pie
1634@itemx --pic-executable
1635@cindex position independent executables
1636Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1637ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1638libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1639address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1640normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1641defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1642
252b5132
RH
1643@kindex -qmagic
1644@item -qmagic
1645This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1646
1647@kindex -Qy
1648@item -Qy
1649This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1650
1651@kindex --relax
1652@cindex synthesizing linker
1653@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1654@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1655@item --relax
28d5f677 1656@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1657An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1658@ifset GENERIC
1659This option is only supported on a few targets.
1660@end ifset
1661@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1662@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1663@end ifset
1664@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1665@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1666@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1667@ifset XTENSA
1668@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1669@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1670@ifset M68HC11
1671@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1672@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
1673@ifset NIOSII
1674@xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1675@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1676@ifset POWERPC
1677@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1678@end ifset
252b5132 1679
28d5f677
NC
1680On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1681global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1682addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1683synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
11e7fd74 1684instructions, and combining constant values.
252b5132
RH
1685
1686On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1687debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1688@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1689This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1690family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1691@end ifset
1692
1693@ifset GENERIC
1694On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1695but ignored.
1696@end ifset
1697
28d5f677
NC
1698On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1699@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1700
252b5132
RH
1701@cindex retaining specified symbols
1702@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1703@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1704@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1705@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1706Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1707discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1708symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1709@ifset GENERIC
1710(such as VxWorks)
1711@end ifset
1712where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1713run-time memory.
1714
1715@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1716or symbols needed for relocations.
1717
1718You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1719line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1720
1721@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1722@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1723@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1724@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1725Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1726linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1727arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1728them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1729also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1730objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1731@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1732ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1733@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1734
ff5dcc92 1735The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
252b5132 1736SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1737@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1738runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1739options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1740gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1741file systems.
252b5132 1742
ff5dcc92 1743For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1744followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1745the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1746@end ifset
1747
1748@ifset GENERIC
1749@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1750@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1751@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1752When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1753happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1754of the input files.
1755
1756When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1757non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1758shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1759explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1760specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1761@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1762either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1763appearing multiple times.
1764
28c309a2
NC
1765This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1766that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1767is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1768runtime linker would do.
1769
252b5132 1770The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1771libraries:
252b5132
RH
1772@enumerate
1773@item
ff5dcc92 1774Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1775@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1776Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1777between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1778specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1779used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1780at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1781by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1782the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1783@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1784On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1785@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1786environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1787@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1788On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1789directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1790@item
a1b8d843 1791For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
e2a83dd0 1792variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1793@item
ec4eb78a
L
1794For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1795@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1796libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1797@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1798@item
252b5132
RH
1799The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1800@item
1801For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1802exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1803@end enumerate
1804
1805If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1806warning and continue with the link.
1807@end ifset
1808
1809@kindex -shared
1810@kindex -Bshareable
1811@item -shared
1812@itemx -Bshareable
1813@cindex shared libraries
1814Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1815and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 1816shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
1817undefined symbols in the link.
1818
252b5132 1819@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
1820@item --sort-common
1821@itemx --sort-common=ascending
1822@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
1823This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1824ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1825sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1826eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1827between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1828specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 1829
2509a395
SL
1830@kindex --sort-section=name
1831@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
1832This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1833patterns in the linker script.
1834
2509a395
SL
1835@kindex --sort-section=alignment
1836@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
1837This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1838patterns in the linker script.
1839
252b5132 1840@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 1841@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 1842Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
1843each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1844size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
1845
1846@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 1847@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 1848Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 1849output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 1850This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
1851certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1852cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1853that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1854support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1855input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1856more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 1857many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
1858
1859@kindex --stats
1860@item --stats
1861Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1862as execution time and memory usage.
1863
2509a395 1864@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
1865@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1866Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1867configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1868that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1869
252b5132
RH
1870@kindex --traditional-format
1871@cindex traditional format
1872@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
1873For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1874the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
1875use the traditional format instead.
1876
1877@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 1878For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
1879symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1880full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1881@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 1882trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
1883combine duplicate entries.
1884
2509a395
SL
1885@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1886@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
1887Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1888address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1889times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1890line.
1891@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1892for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1893@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1894should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1895sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1896
2509a395
SL
1897@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1898@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1899@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 1900@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
1901@item -Tbss=@var{org}
1902@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1903@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1904Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 1905@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 1906
2509a395
SL
1907@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1908@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5 1909@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2b8c06a3
L
1910When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
1911byte of the text segment.
258795f5 1912
9d5777a3
RM
1913@kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1914@item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1915@cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
1916When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
1917the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
1918text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
1919
0d705e9f
AM
1920@kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1921@item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1922@cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
1923When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
1924model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
1925
560e09e9
NC
1926@kindex --unresolved-symbols
1927@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1928Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1929values for @samp{method}:
1930
1931@table @samp
1932@item ignore-all
da8bce14 1933Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
1934
1935@item report-all
da8bce14 1936Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
1937
1938@item ignore-in-object-files
1939Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1940ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1941
1942@item ignore-in-shared-libs
1943Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1944ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
1945when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
1946libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
1947command line.
1948@end table
1949
1950The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
1951by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
1952
1953Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
1954unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
1955can change this to a warning.
1956
1715a13c
L
1957@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
1958@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
252b5132 1959@item --dll-verbose
1715a13c 1960@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
ff5dcc92 1961Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 1962supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1715a13c
L
1963the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
1964argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
252b5132
RH
1965
1966@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1967@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 1968@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
1969Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
1970used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 1971about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
1972is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
1973see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
1974use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
1975symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
1976@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 1977
7ce691ae 1978@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
1979@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
1980@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
1981@item --warn-common
1982Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
11e7fd74 1983a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
252b5132
RH
1984but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
1985you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
11e7fd74 1986Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
1987warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
1988
1989There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
1990
1991@table @samp
1992@item int i = 1;
1993A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
1994file.
1995
1996@item extern int i;
1997An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
1998There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
1999variable somewhere.
2000
2001@item int i;
2002A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2003variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2004The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2005single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2006size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2007a definition of the same variable.
2008@end table
2009
2010The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2011Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2012just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2013encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2014a common symbol.
2015
2016@enumerate
2017@item
2018Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2019definition for the symbol.
2020@smallexample
2021@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2022 overridden by definition
2023@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2024@end smallexample
2025
2026@item
2027Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2028the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2029except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2030@smallexample
2031@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2032 overriding common
2033@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2034@end smallexample
2035
2036@item
2037Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2038@smallexample
2039@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2040 of `@var{symbol}'
2041@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2042@end smallexample
2043
2044@item
2045Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2046@smallexample
2047@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2048 overridden by larger common
2049@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2050@end smallexample
2051
2052@item
2053Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2054the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2055encountered in a different order.
2056@smallexample
2057@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2058 overriding smaller common
2059@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2060@end smallexample
2061@end enumerate
2062
2063@kindex --warn-constructors
2064@item --warn-constructors
2065Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2066object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2067detect the use of global constructors.
2068
2069@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2070@item --warn-multiple-gp
2071Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2072This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2073Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2074section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2075of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2076base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2077base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2078bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2079large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2080values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2081option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2082
2083@kindex --warn-once
2084@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2085@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2086@item --warn-once
2087Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2088which refers to it.
2089
3ea60775
NC
2090@kindex --warn-orphan
2091@kindex --no-warn-orphan
2092@cindex warnings, on orphan sections
2093@cindex orphan sections, warnings on
2094@item --warn-orphan
2095The @option{--warn-orphan} option tells the linker to generate a
2096warning message whenever it has to place an orphan section into the
2097output file. @xref{Orphan Sections} The @option{--no-warn-orphan}
2098option restores the default behaviour of just silently placing these
2099sections.
2100
252b5132
RH
2101@kindex --warn-section-align
2102@cindex warnings, on section alignment
2103@cindex section alignment, warnings on
2104@item --warn-section-align
2105Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2106alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2107The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2108is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2109the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2110
8fdd7217
NC
2111@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2112@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 2113Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 2114
a0c402a5
L
2115@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2116@item --warn-alternate-em
2117Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2118
560e09e9
NC
2119@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2120@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2121If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2122@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2123This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2124
2125@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2126@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2127This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2128it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2129
252b5132
RH
2130@kindex --whole-archive
2131@cindex including an entire archive
2132@item --whole-archive
2133For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2134@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2135in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2136files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2137library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2138library. This option may be used more than once.
2139
7ec229ce 2140Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2141about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2142Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2143list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2144your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2145
2509a395
SL
2146@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2147@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2148Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2149@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2150undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2151@var{symbol}.
2152
2153This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2154wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2155wishes to call the system function, it should call
2156@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2157
2158Here is a trivial example:
2159
2160@smallexample
2161void *
cc2f008e 2162__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2163@{
cc2f008e 2164 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2165 return __real_malloc (c);
2166@}
2167@end smallexample
2168
ff5dcc92 2169If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2170all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2171instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2172call the real @code{malloc} function.
2173
2174You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2175links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2176you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2177file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2178call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2179
6aa29e7b
JJ
2180@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2181@item --eh-frame-hdr
2182Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2183@code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2184
e41b3a13
JJ
2185@kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2186@item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2187Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2188generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2189if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2190
6c1439be
L
2191@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2192@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2193@item --enable-new-dtags
2194@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2195This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2196systems may not understand them. If you specify
b1b00fcc
MF
2197@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2198and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
ff5dcc92 2199If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2200created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2201those options are only available for ELF systems.
2202
2d643429 2203@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2204@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2205Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2206close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2207time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2208increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2209value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2210
fdc90cb4
JJ
2211@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2212@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2213Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2214@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2215new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2216the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2217hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2218
0ce398f1
L
2219@kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2220@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2221@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2222@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2223@item --compress-debug-sections=none
2224@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2225@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2226@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2227On ELF platforms , these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2228compressed using zlib. @option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't
2229compress DWARF debug sections. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib}
2230and @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compress DWARF debug
2231sections and rename debug section names to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
2232instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2233compresses DWARF debug sections with SHF_COMPRESSED from the ELF ABI.
2234
35835446
JR
2235@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2236@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2237This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2238linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2239for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2240about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2241
4f9c04f7 2242Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 22431021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2244run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2245has been used.
2246
2247The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2248enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2249
c0065db7
RM
2250@kindex --build-id
2251@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2252@item --build-id
2253@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
61e2488c
JT
2254Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
2255or a @code{.build-id} COFF section. The contents of the note are
2256unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2257@code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2258@sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2259@code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2260the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2261string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2262@code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2263is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
24382dca
RM
2264
2265The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2266that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2267unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2268to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2269file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2270string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2271
2272Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2273@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2274@end table
2275
0285c67d
NC
2276@c man end
2277
36f63dca 2278@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2279
0285c67d
NC
2280@c man begin OPTIONS
2281
ff5dcc92 2282The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2283the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2284normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2285use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2286@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2287like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2288symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2289object file).
2290
2291In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2292support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2293PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2294values by either a space or an equals sign.
2295
ff5dcc92 2296@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2297
2298@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2299@item --add-stdcall-alias
2300If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2301as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2302[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2303
2304@kindex --base-file
2305@item --base-file @var{file}
2306Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2307addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2308@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2309[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2310
2311@kindex --dll
2312@item --dll
2313Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2314@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2315file.
bb10df36 2316[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2317
88183869
DK
2318@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2319@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2320@item --enable-long-section-names
2321@itemx --disable-long-section-names
2322The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that permits
2323the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2324for Coff. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2325fully-linked executable images do not carry the Coff string table required
2326to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2327allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2328disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2329generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2330as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
9d5777a3
RM
2331with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2332GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
3efd345c
DK
2333information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2334option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2335section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2336when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2337image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2338[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2339
252b5132
RH
2340@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2341@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2342@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2343@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2344If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2345do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2346only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2347resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2348undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2349@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2350to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2351warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2352import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2353to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2354feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2355@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2356mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2357[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2358
522f09cd
KT
2359@kindex --leading-underscore
2360@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2361@item --leading-underscore
2362@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2363For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2364in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2365disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2366
252b5132
RH
2367@cindex DLLs, creating
2368@kindex --export-all-symbols
2369@item --export-all-symbols
2370If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2371be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2372otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2373explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2374attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2375option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2376@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2377@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2378exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2379re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2380such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2381@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2382@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2383Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2384not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2385extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2386(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2387These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2388@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2389@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2390@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2391@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2392[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2393
2394@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2395@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2396Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2397exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2398[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2399
2927aaca
NC
2400@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2401@item --exclude-all-symbols
2402Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2403[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2404
252b5132
RH
2405@kindex --file-alignment
2406@item --file-alignment
2407Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2408file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2409512.
bb10df36 2410[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2411
2412@cindex heap size
2413@kindex --heap
2414@item --heap @var{reserve}
2415@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2416Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2417to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2418committed.
bb10df36 2419[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2420
2421@cindex image base
2422@kindex --image-base
2423@item --image-base @var{value}
2424Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2425the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2426is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2427your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2428other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2429for dlls.
bb10df36 2430[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2431
2432@kindex --kill-at
2433@item --kill-at
2434If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2435symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2436[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2437
26d2d8a2
BF
2438@kindex --large-address-aware
2439@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2440If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2441header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2442greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2443or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2444section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2445[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2446
f69a2f97
NC
2447@kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2448@item --disable-large-address-aware
2449Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2450This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2451driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2452addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2453[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2454
252b5132
RH
2455@kindex --major-image-version
2456@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2457Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2458[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2459
2460@kindex --major-os-version
2461@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2462Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2463[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2464
2465@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2466@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2467Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2468[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2469
2470@kindex --minor-image-version
2471@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2472Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2473[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2474
2475@kindex --minor-os-version
2476@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2477Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2478[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2479
2480@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2481@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2482Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2483[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2484
2485@cindex DEF files, creating
2486@cindex DLLs, creating
2487@kindex --output-def
2488@item --output-def @var{file}
2489The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2490file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2491(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2492library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2493automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2494[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2495
b044cda1
CW
2496@cindex DLLs, creating
2497@kindex --out-implib
2498@item --out-implib @var{file}
2499The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2500import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2501import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
560e09e9 2502may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
b044cda1
CW
2503makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2504creation step.
bb10df36 2505[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2506
2507@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2508@item --enable-auto-image-base
d0e6d77b
CF
2509@itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2510Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2511@var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2512By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2513for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2514execution are avoided.
bb10df36 2515[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2516
2517@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2518@item --disable-auto-image-base
2519Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2520user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2521default.
bb10df36 2522[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2523
2524@cindex DLLs, linking to
2525@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2526@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2527When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2528search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2529@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2530between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2531uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2532@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2533[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2534
2535@kindex --enable-auto-import
2536@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e
NC
2537Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2538DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
4d8907ac
DS
2539building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2540'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2541to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2542specification published by Microsoft.
2543
e2a83dd0
NC
2544Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2545data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2546placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2547around a problem with consts that is described here:
2548http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2549
4d8907ac
DS
2550Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2551see this message:
0d888aac 2552
ece2d90e 2553"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2554documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2555
ece2d90e
NC
2556This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2557ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2558allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2559fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2560constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2561multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2562this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2563of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2564the warning, and exit.
2565
2566There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2567data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2568
2fa9fc65
NC
2569One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2570of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2571this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2572
c0065db7
RM
2573A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2574that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2575there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2576a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2577
2578@example
2579extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2580extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2581 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2582@end example
2583
2584or
2585
2586@example
2587extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2588extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2589 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2590@end example
2591
c0065db7 2592For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2593is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2594
2595@example
2596extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2597extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2598 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2599@end example
2600
c406afaf
NC
2601or
2602
2603@example
2604extern long long extern_ll;
2605extern_ll -->
2606 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2607@end example
2608
2fa9fc65 2609A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2610'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
11e7fd74 2611@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
0d888aac 2612requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2613building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2614merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2615between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2616constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2617
2618Original:
2619@example
2620--foo.h
2621extern int arr[];
2622--foo.c
2623#include "foo.h"
2624void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2625 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2626@}
2627@end example
2628
2629Solution 1:
2630@example
2631--foo.h
2632extern int arr[];
2633--foo.c
2634#include "foo.h"
2635void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2636 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2637 volatile int *parr = arr;
2638 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2639@}
2640@end example
2641
2642Solution 2:
2643@example
2644--foo.h
2645/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2646#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2647 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2648#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2649#else
2650#define FOO_IMPORT
2651#endif
2652extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2653--foo.c
2654#include "foo.h"
2655void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2656 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2657@}
2658@end example
2659
c0065db7 2660A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2661library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2662for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2663functions).
bb10df36 2664[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2665
2666@kindex --disable-auto-import
2667@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2668Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2669@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2670[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2671
2fa9fc65
NC
2672@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2673@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2674If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2675that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2676a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2677environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2678[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2679
2680@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2681@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2682Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
676ee43b 2683DLLs.
bb10df36 2684[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2685
b044cda1
CW
2686@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2687@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2688Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2689[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2690
252b5132
RH
2691@kindex --section-alignment
2692@item --section-alignment
2693Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2694addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2695[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2696
2697@cindex stack size
2698@kindex --stack
2699@item --stack @var{reserve}
2700@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2701Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2702to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2703committed.
bb10df36 2704[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2705
2706@kindex --subsystem
2707@item --subsystem @var{which}
2708@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2709@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2710Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2711legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2712@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2713the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2714@var{which}.
bb10df36 2715[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2716
2f563b51
DK
2717The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2718of the PE file header:
2719[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2720
2d5c3743
NC
2721@kindex --high-entropy-va
2722@item --high-entropy-va
2723Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2724(ASLR).
2725
2f563b51
DK
2726@kindex --dynamicbase
2727@item --dynamicbase
2728The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2729randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2730Vista for i386 PE targets.
2731
2732@kindex --forceinteg
2733@item --forceinteg
2734Code integrity checks are enforced.
2735
2736@kindex --nxcompat
2737@item --nxcompat
2738The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2739This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2740
2741@kindex --no-isolation
2742@item --no-isolation
2743Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2744
2745@kindex --no-seh
2746@item --no-seh
2747The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2748this image.
2749
2750@kindex --no-bind
2751@item --no-bind
2752Do not bind this image.
2753
2754@kindex --wdmdriver
2755@item --wdmdriver
2756The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
9d5777a3 2757
2f563b51
DK
2758@kindex --tsaware
2759@item --tsaware
2760The image is Terminal Server aware.
2761
0cb112f7
CF
2762@kindex --insert-timestamp
2763@item --insert-timestamp
eeb14e5a
LZ
2764@itemx --no-insert-timestamp
2765Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
2766as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
2767other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
2768will result in slightly different images being produced each tiem the
2769same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
2770can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
2771that binaries produced from indentical sources will compare
2772identically.
252b5132
RH
2773@end table
2774
0285c67d
NC
2775@c man end
2776
ac145307
BS
2777@ifset C6X
2778@subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2779
2780@c man begin OPTIONS
2781
2782The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2783libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2784all executables use an index of 0.
2785
2786@table @gcctabopt
2787
2788@kindex --dsbt-size
2789@item --dsbt-size @var{size}
2790This option sets the number of entires in the DSBT of the current executable
2791or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2792entries.
2793
2794@kindex --dsbt-index
2795@item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2796This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2797to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2798executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2799@code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2800
fbd9ad90
PB
2801@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
2802The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
2803exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2804
ac145307
BS
2805@end table
2806
2807@c man end
2808@end ifset
2809
93fd0973
SC
2810@ifset M68HC11
2811@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2812
2813@c man begin OPTIONS
2814
2815The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2816memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2817
2818@table @gcctabopt
2819
2820@kindex --no-trampoline
2821@item --no-trampoline
2822This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2823is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2824instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2825
2826@kindex --bank-window
2827@item --bank-window @var{name}
2828This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2829the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2830The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2831paging and addresses within the memory window.
2832
2833@end table
2834
2835@c man end
2836@end ifset
2837
7fb9f789
NC
2838@ifset M68K
2839@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2840
2841@c man begin OPTIONS
2842
2843The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2844when linking for 68K targets.
2845
2846@table @gcctabopt
2847
2848@kindex --got
2849@item --got=@var{type}
2850This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2851@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2852@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2853Info entry for @file{ld}.
2854
2855@end table
2856
2857@c man end
2858@end ifset
2859
833794fc
MR
2860@ifset MIPS
2861@subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
2862
2863@c man begin OPTIONS
2864
2865The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
2866generation when linking for MIPS targets.
2867
2868@table @gcctabopt
2869
2870@kindex --insn32
2871@item --insn32
2872@kindex --no-insn32
2873@itemx --no-insn32
2874These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
2875generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
2876or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
287732-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
2878used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
2879possible.
2880
2881@end table
2882
2883@c man end
2884@end ifset
2885
252b5132
RH
2886@ifset UsesEnvVars
2887@node Environment
2888@section Environment Variables
2889
0285c67d
NC
2890@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2891
560e09e9 2892You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
2893@ifclear SingleFormat
2894@code{GNUTARGET},
2895@end ifclear
2896@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 2897
36f63dca 2898@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
2899@kindex GNUTARGET
2900@cindex default input format
2901@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2902use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2903of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 2904@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
2905of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2906attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2907this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2908there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2909object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2910BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2911in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 2912@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
2913
2914@kindex LDEMULATION
2915@cindex default emulation
2916@cindex emulation, default
2917@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2918@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2919behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2920available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2921the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2922variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2923linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
2924
2925@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2926@cindex demangling, default
2927Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2928@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2929default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2930a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2931may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2932options.
2933
0285c67d
NC
2934@c man end
2935@end ifset
2936
252b5132
RH
2937@node Scripts
2938@chapter Linker Scripts
2939
2940@cindex scripts
2941@cindex linker scripts
2942@cindex command files
2943Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
2944written in the linker command language.
2945
2946The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2947the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2948the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
2949more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2950direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2951described below.
2952
2953The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
2954yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2955linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
2956to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
2957such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
2958
2959You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
2960line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
2961default linker script.
2962
2963You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
2964to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
2965Linker Scripts}.
2966
2967@menu
2968* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
2969* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
2970* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
2971* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
2972* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
2973* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
2974* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
2975* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
2976* VERSION:: VERSION Command
2977* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
2978* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
2979@end menu
2980
2981@node Basic Script Concepts
2982@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
2983@cindex linker script concepts
2984We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
2985describe the linker script language.
2986
2987The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
2988file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
2989@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
2990The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
2991purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
2992among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
2993section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
2994in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
2995
2996Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
2997also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
56dd11f0 2998contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
252b5132
RH
2999the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3000A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3001area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3002loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3003which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3004of debugging information.
3005
3006Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3007first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3008the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3009@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3010section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3011same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3012is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3013(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3014based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3015RAM address would be the VMA.
3016
3017You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3018program with the @samp{-h} option.
3019
3020Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3021@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3022has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3023information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3024will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3025static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3026referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3027
3028You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3029program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3030option.
3031
3032@node Script Format
3033@section Linker Script Format
3034@cindex linker script format
3035Linker scripts are text files.
3036
3037You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3038either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3039symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3040generally ignored.
3041
3042Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3043If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3044otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3045double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3046file name.
3047
3048You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3049@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3050to whitespace.
3051
3052@node Simple Example
3053@section Simple Linker Script Example
3054@cindex linker script example
3055@cindex example of linker script
3056Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3057
3058The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3059@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3060memory layout of the output file.
3061
3062The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3063describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3064code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3065@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3066Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3067your input files.
3068
3069For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
30700x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3071linker script which will do that:
3072@smallexample
3073SECTIONS
3074@{
3075 . = 0x10000;
3076 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3077 . = 0x8000000;
3078 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3079 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3080@}
3081@end smallexample
3082
3083You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3084followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3085descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3086
252b5132
RH
3087The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3088sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3089counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3090other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3091current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3092incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3093@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3094
3095The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3096required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3097after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3098which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3099wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3100means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3101
3102Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3103@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3104@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3105
3106The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3107the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3108at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3109output section, the value of the location counter will be
3110@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3111effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 3112immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
3113
3114The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3115alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3116example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3117sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3118may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3119sections.
3120
3121That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3122
3123@node Simple Commands
3124@section Simple Linker Script Commands
3125@cindex linker script simple commands
3126In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3127
3128@menu
3129* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3130* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3131@ifclear SingleFormat
3132* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3133@end ifclear
3134
4a93e180 3135* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
3136* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3137@end menu
3138
3139@node Entry Point
36f63dca 3140@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
3141@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3142@cindex start of execution
3143@cindex first instruction
3144@cindex entry point
3145The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3146point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3147entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3148@smallexample
3149ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3150@end smallexample
3151
3152There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3153entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3154stopping when one of them succeeds:
3155@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 3156@item
252b5132 3157the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 3158@item
252b5132 3159the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 3160@item
3ab904c4
NC
3161the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3162targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3163check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 3164@item
252b5132 3165the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 3166@item
252b5132
RH
3167The address @code{0}.
3168@end itemize
3169
3170@node File Commands
36f63dca 3171@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
3172@cindex linker script file commands
3173Several linker script commands deal with files.
3174
3175@table @code
3176@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3177@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3178@cindex including a linker script
3179Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3180be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 3181with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
318210 levels deep.
3183
4006703d
NS
3184You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3185@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3186
252b5132
RH
3187@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3188@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3189@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3190@cindex input files in linker scripts
3191@cindex input object files in linker scripts
3192@cindex linker script input object files
3193The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3194in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3195
3196For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3197a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3198then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3199
3200In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3201script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3202
e3f2db7f
AO
3203In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3204with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3205located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3206for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3207open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
cad60a33
HPN
3208linker will search through the archive library search path.
3209The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3210as the first character in the filename path. See also the
e3f2db7f 3211description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 3212
ff5dcc92 3213If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
3214name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3215@samp{-l}.
3216
3217When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3218files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3219script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3220
3221@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3222@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3223@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3224@cindex grouping input files
3225The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3226files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3227new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3228in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3229
b717d30e
JJ
3230@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3231@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3232@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3233This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3234commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3235as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3236with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3237when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3238@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3239and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3240setting afterwards.
3241
252b5132
RH
3242@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3243@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3244@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3245The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3246@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3247@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3248Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3249precedence.
3250
3251You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3252output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3253
3254@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3255@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3256@cindex library search path in linker script
3257@cindex archive search path in linker script
3258@cindex search path in linker script
3259The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3260@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
3261@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3262on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3263are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3264the command line option are searched first.
3265
3266@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3267@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3268@cindex first input file
3269The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3270that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3271though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3272when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3273first file.
3274@end table
3275
3276@ifclear SingleFormat
3277@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3278@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3279A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3280
3281@table @code
3282@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3283@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3284@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3285@cindex output file format in linker script
3286The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3287output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3288exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
3289(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3290line option takes precedence.
3291
3292You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3293formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3294This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3295desired endianness.
3296
3297If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3298will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3299output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3300used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3301
3302For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3303command:
3304@smallexample
3305OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3306@end smallexample
3307This says that the default format for the output file is
3308@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3309option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3310format.
3311
3312@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3313@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3314@cindex input file format in linker script
3315The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3316files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3317This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3318(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3319is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3320command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3321@end table
3322@end ifclear
3323
4a93e180
NC
3324@node REGION_ALIAS
3325@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3326@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3327@cindex region alias
3328@cindex region names
3329
3330Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3331@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3332
3333@smallexample
3334REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3335@end smallexample
3336
3337The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3338memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3339to memory regions. An example follows.
3340
3341Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3342memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3343that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3344non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3345access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3346read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3347sections:
3348
3349@itemize @bullet
3350@item
3351@code{.text} program code;
3352@item
3353@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3354@item
3355@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3356@item
3357@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3358@end itemize
3359
3360The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3361part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3362output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3363systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3364@code{C}:
3365@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3366@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
9d5777a3 3367@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
4a93e180
NC
3368@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3369@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3370@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3371@end multitable
3372The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3373loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3374the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3375the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3376
3377The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3378includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3379memory layout:
3380@smallexample
3381INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3382
3383SECTIONS
3384 @{
3385 .text :
3386 @{
3387 *(.text)
3388 @} > REGION_TEXT
3389 .rodata :
3390 @{
3391 *(.rodata)
3392 rodata_end = .;
3393 @} > REGION_RODATA
3394 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3395 @{
3396 data_start = .;
3397 *(.data)
3398 @} > REGION_DATA
3399 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3400 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3401 .bss :
3402 @{
3403 *(.bss)
3404 @} > REGION_BSS
3405 @}
3406@end smallexample
3407
3408Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3409regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3410variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3411@table @code
3412@item A
3413Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3414@smallexample
3415MEMORY
3416 @{
3417 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3418 @}
3419
3420REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3421REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3422REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3423REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3424@end smallexample
3425@item B
3426Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3427into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3428@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3429@smallexample
3430MEMORY
3431 @{
3432 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3433 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3434 @}
3435
3436REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3437REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3438REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3439REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3440@end smallexample
3441@item C
3442Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3443@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3444initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3445system start into the @code{RAM}.
3446@smallexample
3447MEMORY
3448 @{
3449 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3450 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3451 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3452 @}
3453
3454REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3455REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3456REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3457REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3458@end smallexample
3459@end table
3460
3461It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3462@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3463necessary:
3464@smallexample
3465#include <string.h>
3466
3467extern char data_start [];
3468extern char data_size [];
3469extern char data_load_start [];
3470
3471void copy_data(void)
3472@{
3473 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3474 @{
3475 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3476 @}
3477@}
3478@end smallexample
3479
252b5132 3480@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3481@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3482There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3483
3484@table @code
3485@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3486@kindex ASSERT
3487@cindex assertion in linker script
3488Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3489with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3490
fd1c4238
NC
3491Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3492take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3493inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3494for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3495symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3496
3497@smallexample
3498 .stack :
3499 @{
3500 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3501 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3502 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3503 @}
3504@end smallexample
3505
3506will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3507PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3508can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3509
3510@smallexample
3511 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3512 .stack :
3513 @{
3514 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3515 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3516 @}
3517@end smallexample
3518
3519will work.
3520
252b5132
RH
3521@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3522@kindex EXTERN
3523@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3524Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3525symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3526modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3527each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3528command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3529
3530@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3531@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3532@cindex common allocation in linker script
3533This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3534to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3535output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3536
4818e05f
AM
3537@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3538@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3539@cindex common allocation in linker script
3540This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3541command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3542to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3543
53d25da6
AM
3544@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3545@kindex INSERT
3546@cindex insert user script into default script
3547This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3548augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3549inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3550@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3551default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3552sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3553linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3554insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3555linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3556default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3557of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3558to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3559is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3560
3561@smallexample
3562SECTIONS
3563@{
3564 OVERLAY :
3565 @{
3566 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3567 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3568 @}
3569@}
3570INSERT AFTER .text;
3571@end smallexample
3572
252b5132
RH
3573@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3574@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3575@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3576This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3577references among certain output sections.
3578
3579In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3580using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3581will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3582errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3583a function defined in the other section.
3584
3585The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3586@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3587an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3588@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3589names.
3590
3591@ifclear SingleFormat
3592@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3593@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3594@cindex machine architecture
3595@cindex architecture
3596Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3597of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3598architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3599the @samp{-f} option.
3600@end ifclear
01554a74
AM
3601
3602@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3603@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3604This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3605@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3606in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3607@xref{Expression Section}.
252b5132
RH
3608@end table
3609
3610@node Assignments
3611@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3612@cindex assignment in scripts
3613@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3614@cindex variables, defining
3615You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3616the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3617
3618@menu
3619* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
eb8476a6 3620* HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
252b5132 3621* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3622* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3623* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3624@end menu
3625
3626@node Simple Assignments
3627@subsection Simple Assignments
3628
3629You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3630
3631@table @code
3632@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3633@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3634@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3635@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3636@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3637@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3638@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3639@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3640@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3641@end table
3642
3643The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3644@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3645defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3646
3647The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3648may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3649
3650The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3651
3652Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3653
3654You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3655statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3656section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3657
3658The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3659expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3660
3661Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3662assignments may be used:
3663
3664@smallexample
3665floating_point = 0;
3666SECTIONS
3667@{
3668 .text :
3669 @{
3670 *(.text)
3671 _etext = .;
3672 @}
156e34dd 3673 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3674 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3675@}
3676@end smallexample
3677@noindent
3678In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3679zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3680the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3681defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3682upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3683
eb8476a6
MR
3684@node HIDDEN
3685@subsection HIDDEN
3686@cindex HIDDEN
3687For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3688exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3689
3690Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3691@code{HIDDEN}:
3692
3693@smallexample
3694HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3695SECTIONS
3696@{
3697 .text :
3698 @{
3699 *(.text)
3700 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3701 @}
3702 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3703 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3704@}
3705@end smallexample
3706@noindent
3707In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3708
252b5132
RH
3709@node PROVIDE
3710@subsection PROVIDE
3711@cindex PROVIDE
3712In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3713only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3714the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3715@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3716@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3717@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3718@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3719@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3720
3721Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3722@smallexample
3723SECTIONS
3724@{
3725 .text :
3726 @{
3727 *(.text)
3728 _etext = .;
3729 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3730 @}
3731@}
3732@end smallexample
3733
3734In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3735underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3736the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3737underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3738If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3739linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3740
7af8e998
L
3741@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3742@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3743@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3744Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3745hidden and won't be exported.
3746
73ae6183
NC
3747@node Source Code Reference
3748@subsection Source Code Reference
3749
3750Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3751intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3752a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3753symbol that does not have a value.
3754
3755Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3756transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3757stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3758prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3759mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3760of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3761variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3762linker script variable might be referred to as:
3763
3764@smallexample
3765 extern int foo;
3766@end smallexample
3767
3768But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3769
3770@smallexample
3771 _foo = 1000;
3772@end smallexample
3773
3774In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3775transformation has taken place.
3776
3777When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3778things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3779in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3780second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3781table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3782contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3783value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3784
3785@smallexample
3786 int foo = 1000;
3787@end smallexample
3788
10bf6894 3789creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
73ae6183
NC
3790holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3791number 1000 is initially stored.
3792
3793When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3794first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3795memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3796So:
3797
3798@smallexample
3799 foo = 1;
3800@end smallexample
3801
3802looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3803associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3804address. Whereas:
3805
3806@smallexample
3807 int * a = & foo;
3808@end smallexample
3809
10bf6894 3810looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
73ae6183
NC
3811and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3812the variable @samp{a}.
3813
3814Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3815the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3816an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3817
3818@smallexample
3819 foo = 1000;
3820@end smallexample
3821
3822creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3823the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3824address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3825linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3826access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3827
3828Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3829you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3830use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3831section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3832linker script contains these declarations:
3833
3834@smallexample
3835@group
3836 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3837 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
3838 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3839@end group
3840@end smallexample
3841
3842Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3843
3844@smallexample
3845@group
3846 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 3847
73ae6183
NC
3848 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3849@end group
3850@end smallexample
3851
3852Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3853
252b5132 3854@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 3855@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
3856@kindex SECTIONS
3857The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3858into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3859
3860The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3861@smallexample
3862SECTIONS
3863@{
3864 @var{sections-command}
3865 @var{sections-command}
3866 @dots{}
3867@}
3868@end smallexample
3869
3870Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3871
3872@itemize @bullet
3873@item
3874an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3875@item
3876a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3877@item
3878an output section description
3879@item
3880an overlay description
3881@end itemize
3882
3883The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3884@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3885those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3886understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3887the layout of the output file.
3888
3889Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3890below.
3891
3892If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3893linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3894section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3895input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3896example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3897in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3898
3899@menu
3900* Output Section Description:: Output section description
3901* Output Section Name:: Output section name
3902* Output Section Address:: Output section address
3903* Input Section:: Input section description
3904* Output Section Data:: Output section data
3905* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3906* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3907* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3908* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3909@end menu
3910
3911@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 3912@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
3913The full description of an output section looks like this:
3914@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 3915@group
7e7d5768 3916@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759 3917 [AT(@var{lma})]
1eec346e 3918 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
0c71d759
NC
3919 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
3920 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
3921 @{
3922 @var{output-section-command}
3923 @var{output-section-command}
3924 @dots{}
abc9061b 3925 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
252b5132
RH
3926@end group
3927@end smallexample
3928
3929Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3930
3931The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3932name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
abc9061b
CC
3933The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
3934the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
252b5132
RH
3935The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3936
3937Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3938
3939@itemize @bullet
3940@item
3941a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3942@item
3943an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
3944@item
3945data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
3946@item
3947a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
3948@end itemize
3949
3950@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 3951@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
3952@cindex name, section
3953@cindex section name
3954The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
3955meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
3956support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
3957must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
3958example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
3959output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
3960names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
3961quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
3962characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
3963commas must be quoted.
3964
3965The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
3966Discarding}.
3967
3968@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 3969@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
3970@cindex address, section
3971@cindex section address
3972The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
3973address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
3974is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
3975
3976If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
3977section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
3978to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
3979alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
3980contained within the output section.
3981
3982The output section address heuristic is as follows:
3983
3984@itemize @bullet
3985@item
3986If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
3987is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
3988in that region.
3989
3990@item
3991If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
3992regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
3993section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
3994be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
3995
3996@item
3997If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
3998the output address will be based on the current value of the location
3999counter.
4000@end itemize
4001
4002@noindent
4003For example:
4004
252b5132
RH
4005@smallexample
4006.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4007@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4008
252b5132
RH
4009@noindent
4010and
ea5cae92 4011
252b5132
RH
4012@smallexample
4013.text : @{ *(.text) @}
4014@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4015
252b5132
RH
4016@noindent
4017are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4018@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4019counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
4020counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4021input sections.
252b5132
RH
4022
4023The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4024For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4025so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4026do something like this:
4027@smallexample
4028.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4029@end smallexample
4030@noindent
4031This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4032aligned upward to the specified value.
4033
4034Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
4035location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4036sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
4037
4038@node Input Section
36f63dca 4039@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
4040@cindex input sections
4041@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4042The most common output section command is an input section description.
4043
4044The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4045You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4046in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4047map the input files into your memory layout.
4048
4049@menu
4050* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4051* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4052* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4053* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4054* Input Section Example:: Input section example
4055@end menu
4056
4057@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 4058@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
4059@cindex input section basics
4060An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4061by a list of section names in parentheses.
4062
4063The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4064describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4065
4066The most common input section description is to include all input
4067sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4068include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4069@smallexample
4070*(.text)
4071@end smallexample
4072@noindent
18625d54
CM
4073Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
4074of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4075match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4076example:
252b5132 4077@smallexample
b4346c09 4078*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 4079@end smallexample
765b7cbe
JB
4080will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
4081@file{otherfile.o} to be included.
252b5132
RH
4082
4083There are two ways to include more than one section:
4084@smallexample
4085*(.text .rdata)
4086*(.text) *(.rdata)
4087@end smallexample
4088@noindent
4089The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4090@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
4091first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4092they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
4093@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4094@samp{.rdata} input sections.
4095
4096You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4097You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4098needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4099@smallexample
4100data.o(.data)
4101@end smallexample
4102
ae17ab41
CM
4103To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4104of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4105
4106Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4107
4108@smallexample
4109@group
4110SECTIONS @{
4111 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4112 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4113@}
4114@end group
4115@end smallexample
4116
4117In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4118input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4119@code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4120@samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4121whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4122
967928e9
AM
4123You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4124matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4125with no whitespace around the colon.
4126
4127@table @samp
4128@item archive:file
4129matches file within archive
4130@item archive:
4131matches the whole archive
4132@item :file
4133matches file but not one in an archive
4134@end table
4135
4136Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4137wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4138single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4139@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4140within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4141also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4142other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4143from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4144command.
4145
252b5132
RH
4146If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4147the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4148commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4149@smallexample
4150data.o
4151@end smallexample
4152
967928e9
AM
4153When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4154and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
4155characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4156name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4157did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4158though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4159@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4160the archive search path.
4161
4162@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 4163@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
4164@cindex input section wildcards
4165@cindex wildcard file name patterns
4166@cindex file name wildcard patterns
4167@cindex section name wildcard patterns
4168In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4169name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4170
4171The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4172pattern for the file name.
4173
4174The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4175
4176@table @samp
4177@item *
4178matches any number of characters
4179@item ?
4180matches any single character
4181@item [@var{chars}]
4182matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4183character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4184@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4185@item \
4186quotes the following character
4187@end table
4188
4189When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4190will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4191Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4192exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4193@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4194a @samp{/} character.
4195
4196File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4197specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4198does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4199
4200If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4201appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4202will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4203sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4204@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4205@smallexample
4206.data : @{ *(.data) @}
4207.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4208@end smallexample
4209
bcaa7b3e 4210@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
4211Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4212in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
4213this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4214pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4215@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
4216into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4217
bcaa7b3e
L
4218@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4219@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4220difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
1ae5c3ae 4221descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
ee83b8a6
NC
4222Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4223reduce the amount of padding necessary.
bcaa7b3e 4224
02ecc8e9
L
4225@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4226@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4227difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4228ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4229encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4230
bcaa7b3e
L
4231@cindex SORT
4232@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4233
4234When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4235can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4236
4237@enumerate
4238@item
4239@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4240It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4241sections have the same name.
4242@item
4243@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4244It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4245sections have the same alignment.
4246@item
c0065db7 4247@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
4248treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4249@item
4250@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4251is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4252@item
4253All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4254@end enumerate
4255
4256When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4257section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4258takes precedence over the command line option.
4259
4260If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4261command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4262treated as nested sorting command.
4263
4264@enumerate
4265@item
4266@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4267@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4268@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4269@item
4270@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4271@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4272@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4273@end enumerate
4274
4275If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4276command line option will be ignored.
4277
eda680f8
L
4278@cindex SORT_NONE
4279@code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4280section sorting option.
4281
252b5132
RH
4282If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4283@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4284precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4285
4286This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4287files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4288sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4289The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4290with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4291linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4292@smallexample
4293@group
4294SECTIONS @{
4295 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4296 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4297 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4298 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4299@}
4300@end group
4301@end smallexample
4302
4303@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 4304@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
4305@cindex common symbol placement
4306@cindex uninitialized data placement
4307A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4308file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4309linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4310named @samp{COMMON}.
4311
4312You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4313other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4314particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4315input files are placed in another section.
4316
4317In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4318@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4319@smallexample
4320.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4321@end smallexample
4322
4323@cindex scommon section
4324@cindex small common symbols
4325Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4326example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4327symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4328different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4329the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4330symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4331to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4332locations.
4333
4334@cindex [COMMON]
4335You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4336notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4337@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4338
4339@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4340@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4341@cindex KEEP
4342@cindex garbage collection
4343When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4344it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4345This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4346with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4347@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4348
4349@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4350@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4351The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4352to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4353start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4354@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4355follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4356@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4357@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4358All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4359files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4360
4361@smallexample
4362@group
4363SECTIONS @{
4364 outputa 0x10000 :
4365 @{
4366 all.o
4367 foo.o (.input1)
4368 @}
36f63dca
NC
4369@end group
4370@group
252b5132
RH
4371 outputb :
4372 @{
4373 foo.o (.input2)
4374 foo1.o (.input1)
4375 @}
36f63dca
NC
4376@end group
4377@group
252b5132
RH
4378 outputc :
4379 @{
4380 *(.input1)
4381 *(.input2)
4382 @}
4383@}
4384@end group
a1ab1d2a 4385@end smallexample
252b5132
RH
4386
4387@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4388@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4389@cindex data
4390@cindex section data
4391@cindex output section data
4392@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4393@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4394@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4395@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4396@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4397You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4398@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4399an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4400parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4401value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4402counter.
4403
4404The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4405store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4406bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4407stored.
4408
4409For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4410of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4411@smallexample
4412BYTE(1)
4413LONG(addr)
4414@end smallexample
4415
4416When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4417same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4418target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4419@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4420@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4421
4422If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4423which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4424When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4425true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4426endianness of the first input object file.
4427
36f63dca 4428Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4429between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4430@smallexample
4431SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4432@end smallexample
4433whereas this will work:
4434@smallexample
4435SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4436@end smallexample
4437
252b5132
RH
4438@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4439@cindex holes, filling
4440@cindex unspecified memory
4441You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4442current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4443otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4444gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4445with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4446necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4447point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4448than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4449different parts of an output section.
4450
4451This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4452value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4453@smallexample
563e308f 4454FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4455@end smallexample
4456
4457The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4458section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4459part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4460entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4461precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4462expression.
252b5132
RH
4463
4464@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4465@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4466There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4467commands.
4468
4469@table @code
4470@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4471@cindex input filename symbols
4472@cindex filename symbols
4473@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4474The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4475The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4476file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4477the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4478
4479This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4480normally used for any other object file format.
4481
4482@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4483@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4484@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4485@item CONSTRUCTORS
4486When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4487unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4488destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4489arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4490automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4491For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4492linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4493@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4494ignored for other object file formats.
4495
4496The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4497constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4498Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4499the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4500first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4501of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4502compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4503formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4504@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4505the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4506destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4507@code{exit}.
4508
4509For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4510arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4511addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4512and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4513linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4514runtime code expects to see.
4515
4516@smallexample
4517 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4518 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4519 *(.ctors)
4520 LONG(0)
4521 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4522 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4523 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4524 *(.dtors)
4525 LONG(0)
4526 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4527@end smallexample
4528
4529If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4530which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4531are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4532are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4533command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4534@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4535@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4536@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4537
4538Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4539and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4540need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4541scripts.
4542
4543@end table
4544
4545@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4546@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4547@cindex discarding sections
4548@cindex sections, discarding
4549@cindex removing sections
2edab91c
AM
4550The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4551This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4552may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4553@smallexample
49c13adb 4554.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4555@end smallexample
4556@noindent
4557will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4558@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4559sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
2edab91c
AM
4560space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4561too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4562space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4563@samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4564@samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4565This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
74541ad4 4566
a0976ea4 4567The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4568on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4569symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4570the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4571section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4572
4573@cindex /DISCARD/
4574The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4575input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4576section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4577
4578@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4579@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4580@cindex output section attributes
4581We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4582like this:
0c71d759 4583
252b5132 4584@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4585@group
7e7d5768 4586@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
4587 [AT(@var{lma})]
4588 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4589 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4590 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4591 @{
4592 @var{output-section-command}
4593 @var{output-section-command}
4594 @dots{}
562d3460 4595 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
4596@end group
4597@end smallexample
0c71d759 4598
252b5132
RH
4599We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4600@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4601remaining section attributes.
4602
a1ab1d2a 4603@menu
252b5132
RH
4604* Output Section Type:: Output section type
4605* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 4606* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 4607* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 4608* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
4609* Output Section Region:: Output section region
4610* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4611* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4612@end menu
4613
4614@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 4615@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
4616Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4617parentheses. The following types are defined:
4618
4619@table @code
4620@item NOLOAD
4621The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4622loaded into memory when the program is run.
4623@item DSECT
4624@itemx COPY
4625@itemx INFO
4626@itemx OVERLAY
4627These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4628rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4629marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4630section when the program is run.
4631@end table
4632
4633@kindex NOLOAD
4634@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4635@cindex loading, preventing
4636The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4637the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4638the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4639@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 4640need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
4641@smallexample
4642@group
4643SECTIONS @{
4644 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4645 @dots{}
4646@}
4647@end group
4648@end smallexample
4649
4650@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 4651@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 4652@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
4653@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4654@cindex load address
4655@cindex section load address
4656Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
4657@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4658@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4659specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4660address is optional.
6bdafbeb 4661
ea5cae92
NC
4662The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4663specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4664takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4665load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4666region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
4667
4668If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
4669section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4670load address:
4671
4672@itemize @bullet
4673@item
4674If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4675the LMA address as well.
4676
4677@item
4678If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4679
4680@item
4681Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4682with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4683section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4684VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4685the last section in the located region.
4686
4687@item
4688If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4689that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4690
4691@item
4692If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4693section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4694@end itemize
252b5132
RH
4695
4696@cindex ROM initialized data
4697@cindex initialized data in ROM
4698This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4699example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4700called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4701@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4702even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4703uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4704defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4705counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4706
4707@smallexample
4708@group
4709SECTIONS
4710 @{
4711 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 4712 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
4713 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4714 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4715 .bss 0x3000 :
4716 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4717@}
4718@end group
4719@end smallexample
4720
4721The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4722this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4723the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4724how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4725script.
4726
4727@smallexample
4728@group
4729extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4730char *src = &_etext;
4731char *dst = &_data;
4732
ea5cae92
NC
4733/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4734while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 4735 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 4736
ea5cae92 4737/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
4738for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4739 *dst = 0;
4740@end group
4741@end smallexample
4742
bbf115d3
L
4743@node Forced Output Alignment
4744@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4745@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4746@cindex forcing output section alignment
4747@cindex output section alignment
1eec346e 4748You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
13075d04
SH
4749alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
4750intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
bbf115d3 4751
7e7d5768
AM
4752@node Forced Input Alignment
4753@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4754@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4755@cindex forcing input section alignment
4756@cindex input section alignment
4757You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4758SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4759sections, whether larger or smaller.
4760
0c71d759
NC
4761@node Output Section Constraint
4762@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4763@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4764@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4765@cindex constraints on output sections
4766You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4767of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4768read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4769@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4770
252b5132 4771@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 4772@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
4773@kindex >@var{region}
4774@cindex section, assigning to memory region
4775@cindex memory regions and sections
4776You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4777using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4778
4779Here is a simple example:
4780@smallexample
4781@group
4782MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4783SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4784@end group
4785@end smallexample
4786
4787@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 4788@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
4789@kindex :@var{phdr}
4790@cindex section, assigning to program header
4791@cindex program headers and sections
4792You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4793using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4794one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4795assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4796@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4797linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4798
4799Here is a simple example:
4800@smallexample
4801@group
4802PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4803SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4804@end group
4805@end smallexample
4806
4807@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 4808@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
4809@kindex =@var{fillexp}
4810@cindex section fill pattern
4811@cindex fill pattern, entire section
4812You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4813@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4814(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4815within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
4816alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4817necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 4818of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
4819an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4820fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 4821other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
4822pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4823expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
4824
4825You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 4826output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
4827
4828Here is a simple example:
4829@smallexample
4830@group
563e308f 4831SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
4832@end group
4833@end smallexample
4834
4835@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 4836@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
4837@kindex OVERLAY
4838@cindex overlays
4839An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4840are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4841the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4842copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4843required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4844can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4845than another.
4846
4847Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4848@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4849output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4850command is as follows:
4851@smallexample
4852@group
4853OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4854 @{
4855 @var{secname1}
4856 @{
4857 @var{output-section-command}
4858 @var{output-section-command}
4859 @dots{}
4860 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4861 @var{secname2}
4862 @{
4863 @var{output-section-command}
4864 @var{output-section-command}
4865 @dots{}
4866 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4867 @dots{}
abc9061b 4868 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
252b5132
RH
4869@end group
4870@end smallexample
4871
4872Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4873section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4874section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
11e7fd74 4875those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
252b5132
RH
4876except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4877sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4878
abc9061b
CC
4879The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
4880the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
4881
252b5132
RH
4882The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4883addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4884memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4885whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4886and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4887and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4888
56dd11f0
NC
4889If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
4890references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
4891the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
4892sense for one section to refer directly to another.
4893@xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
252b5132
RH
4894
4895For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 4896provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
4897defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4898@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4899the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4900within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4901symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4902
4903At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4904the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4905
4906Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4907@code{SECTIONS} construct.
4908@smallexample
4909@group
4910 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4911 @{
4912 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4913 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4914 @}
4915@end group
4916@end smallexample
4917@noindent
4918This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4919address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4920@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 4921following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
4922@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4923@code{__load_stop_text1}.
4924
4925C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4926like the following.
4927
4928@smallexample
4929@group
4930 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4931 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4932 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4933@end group
4934@end smallexample
4935
4936Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4937everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
4938example could have been written identically as follows.
4939
4940@smallexample
4941@group
4942 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4943 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
4944 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 4945 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4946 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
4947 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
4948 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
4949@end group
4950@end smallexample
4951
4952@node MEMORY
36f63dca 4953@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
4954@kindex MEMORY
4955@cindex memory regions
4956@cindex regions of memory
4957@cindex allocating memory
4958@cindex discontinuous memory
4959The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
4960memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
4961
4962The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
4963memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
4964may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
4965can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
4966set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
4967regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
4968around to fit into the available regions.
4969
4970A linker script may contain at most one use of the @code{MEMORY}
4971command. However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as
4972you wish. The syntax is:
4973@smallexample
4974@group
a1ab1d2a 4975MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4976 @{
4977 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
4978 @dots{}
4979 @}
4980@end group
4981@end smallexample
4982
4983The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
4984region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
4985Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4986with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
4987must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
4988add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
9d5777a3 4989command.
252b5132
RH
4990
4991@cindex memory region attributes
4992The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
4993whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
4994not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
4995@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
4996section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
4997the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
4998them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
4999
5000The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5001@table @samp
5002@item R
5003Read-only section
5004@item W
5005Read/write section
5006@item X
5007Executable section
5008@item A
5009Allocatable section
5010@item I
5011Initialized section
5012@item L
5013Same as @samp{I}
5014@item !
c09e9a8c 5015Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
5016@end table
5017
5018If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
5019@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
5020attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
5021in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
5022attributes.
5023
5024@kindex ORIGIN =
5025@kindex o =
5026@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
5027The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5028the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5029cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5030abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5031@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
5032
5033@kindex LENGTH =
5034@kindex len =
5035@kindex l =
5036The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5037region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
5038be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5039@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
5040
5041In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5042available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5043and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5044linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5045is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5046or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5047explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5048region.
5049
5050@smallexample
5051@group
a1ab1d2a 5052MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5053 @{
5054 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5055 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5056 @}
5057@end group
5058@end smallexample
5059
5060Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5061specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5062@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5063a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5064output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5065was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5066the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5067output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5068region, the linker will issue an error message.
5069
3ec57632 5070It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 5071expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
5072@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5073
5074@smallexample
5075@group
c0065db7 5076 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
5077@end group
5078@end smallexample
5079
252b5132
RH
5080@node PHDRS
5081@section PHDRS Command
5082@kindex PHDRS
5083@cindex program headers
5084@cindex ELF program headers
5085@cindex program segments
5086@cindex segments, ELF
5087The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5088@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5089loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5090program with the @samp{-p} option.
5091
5092When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5093reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5094program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5095This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5096interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5097
5098The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5099in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5100precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5101the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5102not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5103
5104The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5105generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5106ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5107
5108This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5109@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5110
5111@smallexample
5112@group
5113PHDRS
5114@{
5115 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5116 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5117@}
5118@end group
5119@end smallexample
5120
5121The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5122of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5123header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5124with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
5125must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5126is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
5127
5128Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5129system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5130specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5131sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5132attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5133Section Phdr}.
5134
5135It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5136merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5137repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5138contain the section.
5139
5140If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5141then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5142not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5143convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5144placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5145default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5146segment at all.
5147
5148@kindex FILEHDR
5149@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 5150You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
5151the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5152The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5153file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 5154include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
5155segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5156these keywords.
252b5132
RH
5157
5158The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5159value of the keyword.
5160
5161@table @asis
5162@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5163Indicates an unused program header.
5164
5165@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5166Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5167the file.
5168
5169@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5170Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5171
5172@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5173Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5174found.
5175
5176@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5177Indicates a segment holding note information.
5178
5179@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5180A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5181ABI.
5182
5183@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5184Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5185
5186@item @var{expression}
5187An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5188be used for types not defined above.
5189@end table
5190
5191You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5192in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5193@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5194Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5195output section attribute.
5196
5197The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5198which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5199explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5200an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5201header.
5202
5203Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5204headers used on a native ELF system.
5205
5206@example
5207@group
5208PHDRS
5209@{
5210 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5211 interp PT_INTERP ;
5212 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5213 data PT_LOAD ;
5214 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5215@}
5216
5217SECTIONS
5218@{
5219 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5220 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5221 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5222 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5223 @dots{}
5224 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5225 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5226 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5227 @dots{}
5228@}
5229@end group
5230@end example
5231
5232@node VERSION
5233@section VERSION Command
5234@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5235@cindex symbol versions
5236@cindex version script
5237@cindex versions of symbols
5238The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5239only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5240symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5241a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5242shared library.
5243
5244You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5245you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5246also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5247
5248The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5249@smallexample
5250VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5251@end smallexample
5252
5253The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5254Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5255version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5256version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5257version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5258scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5259library.
5260
5261The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5262examples.
5263
5264@smallexample
5265VERS_1.1 @{
5266 global:
5267 foo1;
5268 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
5269 old*;
5270 original*;
5271 new*;
252b5132
RH
5272@};
5273
5274VERS_1.2 @{
5275 foo2;
5276@} VERS_1.1;
5277
5278VERS_2.0 @{
5279 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 5280 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 5281 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
5282 "f(int, double)";
5283 @};
252b5132
RH
5284@} VERS_1.2;
5285@end smallexample
5286
5287This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5288version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5289The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5290a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
5291of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5292symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5293is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5294in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
5295However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5296name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
5297
5298Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5299depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5300to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5301
5302Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5303depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5304and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5305
5306When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5307specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5308unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 5309unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
5310somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5311wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5312wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5313set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5314ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
5315
5316The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5317they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5318could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5319However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5320
0f6bf451 5321Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
5322in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5323symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5324won't.
5325
5326@smallexample
7c9c73be 5327@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 5328@end smallexample
6b9b879a 5329
252b5132
RH
5330When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5331symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5332requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5333shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5334loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5335linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5336application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5337way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5338all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5339search for each symbol reference.
5340
5341The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5342doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5343that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5344functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5345the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5346required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5347that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5348versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5349the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5350
5351There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5352first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5353source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5354script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5355maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5356@smallexample
5357__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5358@end smallexample
5359@noindent
5360in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5361be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5362The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5363@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5364takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5365
5366The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5367function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5368an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5369version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5370linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5371
5372To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5373source file. Here is an example:
5374
5375@smallexample
5376__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5377__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5378__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5379__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5380@end smallexample
5381
5382In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5383unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5384example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5385@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5386
5387When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5388some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5389this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5390@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5391declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5392you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5393
5394If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5395within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5396(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5397specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5398
cb840a31
L
5399You can also specify the language in the version script:
5400
5401@smallexample
5402VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5403@end smallexample
5404
c0065db7 5405The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5406The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5407demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5408patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5409@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5410
86043bbb
MM
5411Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5412described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5413or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5414the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5415whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5416cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5417might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5418should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5419expect when you upgrade.
5420
252b5132
RH
5421@node Expressions
5422@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5423@cindex expressions
5424@cindex arithmetic
5425The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5426that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5427expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5428host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5429
5430You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5431
5432The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5433expressions.
5434
5435@menu
5436* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5437* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5438* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5439* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5440* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5441* Operators:: Operators
5442* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5443* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5444* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5445@end menu
5446
5447@node Constants
5448@subsection Constants
5449@cindex integer notation
5450@cindex constants in linker scripts
5451All constants are integers.
5452
5453As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5454octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8 5455hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
11e7fd74 5456@samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
8a308ae8
NC
5457@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5458value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5459
5460@cindex scaled integers
5461@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5462@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5463@cindex suffixes for integers
5464@cindex integer suffixes
5465In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5466constant by
5467@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5468@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5469@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5470@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5471@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5472@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5473@tex
5474${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5475@end tex
5476@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5477respectively. For example, the following
5478all refer to the same quantity:
5479
252b5132 5480@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5481_fourk_1 = 4K;
5482_fourk_2 = 4096;
5483_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5484_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5485@end smallexample
5486
8a308ae8
NC
5487Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5488conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5489
0c71d759
NC
5490@node Symbolic Constants
5491@subsection Symbolic Constants
5492@cindex symbolic constants
5493@kindex CONSTANT
5494It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5495the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5496
5497@table @code
5498@item MAXPAGESIZE
5499@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5500The target's maximum page size.
5501
5502@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5503@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5504The target's default page size.
5505@end table
5506
5507So for example:
5508
5509@smallexample
9d5777a3 5510 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
0c71d759
NC
5511@end smallexample
5512
5513will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5514supported by the target.
5515
252b5132
RH
5516@node Symbols
5517@subsection Symbol Names
5518@cindex symbol names
5519@cindex names
5520@cindex quoted symbol names
5521@kindex "
5522Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5523and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5524Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5525specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5526keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5527@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5528"SECTION" = 9;
5529"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5530@end smallexample
5531
5532Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5533to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5534whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5535
ecca9871
L
5536@node Orphan Sections
5537@subsection Orphan Sections
5538@cindex orphan
5539Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5540are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5541script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5542output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5543placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5544attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5545same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5546If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5547at the end of the file.
5548
5549For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5550well as section flag.
5551
41911f68 5552If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
a61ca861 5553the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
9aec8434 5554__start_SECNAME and __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
41911f68
NC
5555section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5556orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5557representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5558character.
5559
252b5132
RH
5560@node Location Counter
5561@subsection The Location Counter
5562@kindex .
5563@cindex dot
5564@cindex location counter
5565@cindex current output location
5566The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5567current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5568location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5569within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5570anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5571
5572@cindex holes
5573Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5574moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5575location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5576and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5577doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
5578
5579@smallexample
5580SECTIONS
5581@{
5582 output :
5583 @{
5584 file1(.text)
5585 . = . + 1000;
5586 file2(.text)
5587 . += 1000;
5588 file3(.text)
563e308f 5589 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
5590@}
5591@end smallexample
5592@noindent
5593In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5594located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5595followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5596@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 5597@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
5598specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5599
5c6bbab8
NC
5600@cindex dot inside sections
5601Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5602current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 5603statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
5604absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5605however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5606not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5607
5608@smallexample
5609SECTIONS
5610@{
5611 . = 0x100
5612 .text: @{
5613 *(.text)
5614 . = 0x200
5615 @}
5616 . = 0x500
5617 .data: @{
5618 *(.data)
5619 . += 0x600
5620 @}
5621@}
5622@end smallexample
5623
5624The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5625and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5626the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5627much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5628move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5629and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5630the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5631the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5632
b5666f2f
AM
5633@cindex dot outside sections
5634Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5635output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5636needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5637
5638@smallexample
5639SECTIONS
5640@{
5641 start_of_text = . ;
5642 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5643 end_of_text = . ;
5644
5645 start_of_data = . ;
5646 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5647 end_of_data = . ;
5648@}
5649@end smallexample
5650
5651If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5652not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5653between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5654should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5655blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5656the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5657sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5658statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5659special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5660place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5661as follows:
5662
5663@smallexample
5664SECTIONS
5665@{
5666 start_of_text = . ;
5667 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5668 end_of_text = . ;
5669
5670 start_of_data = . ;
5671 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5672 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5673 end_of_data = . ;
5674@}
5675@end smallexample
5676
5677This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5678@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5679placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5680assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5681a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5682section. So you could write:
5683
5684@smallexample
5685SECTIONS
5686@{
5687 start_of_text = . ;
5688 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5689 end_of_text = . ;
5690
5691 . = . ;
5692 start_of_data = . ;
5693 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5694 end_of_data = . ;
5695@}
5696@end smallexample
5697
5698Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5699@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5700
252b5132
RH
5701@need 2000
5702@node Operators
5703@subsection Operators
5704@cindex operators for arithmetic
5705@cindex arithmetic operators
5706@cindex precedence in expressions
5707The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5708the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5709@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5710@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5711@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5712@smallexample
5713precedence associativity Operators Notes
5714(highest)
57151 left ! - ~ (1)
57162 left * / %
57173 left + -
57184 left >> <<
57195 left == != > < <= >=
57206 left &
57217 left |
57228 left &&
57239 left ||
572410 right ? :
572511 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5726(lowest)
5727@end smallexample
5728Notes:
a1ab1d2a 5729(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
5730(2) @xref{Assignments}.
5731@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5732@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5733@tex
5734\vskip \baselineskip
5735%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5736\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5737\hrule
5738\halign
5739{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5740height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5741&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5742height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5743\noalign{\hrule}
5744height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5745&highest&&&&&\cr
5746% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 5747&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
5748&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5749&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5750&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5751&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5752&6&&left&&\&&\cr
5753&7&&left&&|&\cr
5754&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5755&9&&left&&||&\cr
5756&10&&right&&? :&\cr
5757&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5758&lowest&&&&&\cr
5759height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5760\hrule}
5761@end tex
5762@iftex
5763{
5764@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5765@dag@quad Prefix operators.
5766@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5767}
5768@end iftex
5769@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5770
5771@node Evaluation
5772@subsection Evaluation
5773@cindex lazy evaluation
5774@cindex expression evaluation order
5775The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5776an expression when absolutely necessary.
5777
5778The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5779address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5780regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5781as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5782
5783However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5784until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5785other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5786for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5787
5788The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5789assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5790allocation.
5791
5792Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5793@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5794
5795If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5796available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5797following
5798@smallexample
5799@group
5800SECTIONS
5801 @{
a1ab1d2a 5802 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
5803 @{ *(.text) @}
5804 @}
5805@end group
5806@end smallexample
5807@noindent
5808will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5809address}.
5810
5811@node Expression Section
5812@subsection The Section of an Expression
5813@cindex expression sections
5814@cindex absolute expressions
5815@cindex relative expressions
5816@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5817@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5818@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
5819Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
5820relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
5821using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
5822value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
5823symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
5824operations.
5825
abf4be64
AM
5826Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
5827section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
5828address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
5829@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
5830functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
01554a74
AM
5831One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
5832(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5c3049d2
AM
5833differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
5834versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
5835section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
5836Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
01554a74
AM
5837absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
5838given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
5839everywhere.
5c3049d2
AM
5840
5841In the following simple example,
252b5132 5842
7542af2a
AM
5843@smallexample
5844@group
5845SECTIONS
5846 @{
5847 . = 0x100;
5848 __executable_start = 0x100;
5849 .data :
5850 @{
5851 . = 0x10;
5852 __data_start = 0x10;
5853 *(.data)
5854 @}
5855 @dots{}
5856 @}
5857@end group
5858@end smallexample
252b5132 5859
7542af2a
AM
5860both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
5861address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
5862@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
5863section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 5864
5c3049d2
AM
5865For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
5866addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
7542af2a
AM
5867
5868@itemize @bullet
5869@item
c05f749e
AM
5870Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
5871operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
5872absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
5873@item
7542af2a
AM
5874Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
5875relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
5876and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
5877@item
c05f749e
AM
5878Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
5879in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
5880address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
5881before applying the operator.
7542af2a
AM
5882@end itemize
5883
5884The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
5885
5886@itemize @bullet
5887@item
5888An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
5889@item
5890The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
5891@item
9bc8bb33 5892The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
11e7fd74 5893relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
9bc8bb33
AM
5894(after above conversions) is also a number.
5895@item
5896The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
5897relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
5898section as the relative operand(s).
7542af2a
AM
5899@item
5900The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
5901conversions) is an absolute address.
5902@end itemize
252b5132
RH
5903
5904You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5905to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5906create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5907section @samp{.data}:
5908@smallexample
5909SECTIONS
5910 @{
5911 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5912 @}
5913@end smallexample
5914@noindent
5915If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5916@samp{.data} section.
5917
7542af2a
AM
5918Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
5919particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
5920
252b5132
RH
5921@node Builtin Functions
5922@subsection Builtin Functions
5923@cindex functions in expressions
5924The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5925use in linker script expressions.
5926
5927@table @code
5928@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5929@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5930@cindex expression, absolute
5931Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5932of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5933value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5934normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
5935
5936@item ADDR(@var{section})
5937@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
5938@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 5939Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 5940script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
5941the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
5942@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
5943@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
5944the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
5945@smallexample
5946@group
5947SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5948 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 5949 @{
252b5132
RH
5950 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
5951 @dots{}
5952 @}
5953 .output :
5954 @{
5955 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
5956 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
5957 @}
5958@dots{} @}
5959@end group
5960@end smallexample
5961
876f4090
NS
5962@item ALIGN(@var{align})
5963@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5964@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
5965@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
5966@cindex round up location counter
5967@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
5968@cindex round up expression
5969@cindex align expression
5970Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
5971to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
5972doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
5973arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
5974expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
5975equivalent to @code{ALIGN(., @var{align})}).
5976
5977Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
5978next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
5979variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
5980input sections:
252b5132
RH
5981@smallexample
5982@group
5983SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5984 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
5985 *(.data)
5986 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
5987 @}
5988@dots{} @}
5989@end group
5990@end smallexample
5991@noindent
5992The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
5993a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
5994a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
5995of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
5996
5997The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
5998
362c1d1a
NS
5999@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6000@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6001@cindex section alignment
6002Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6003been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6004evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6005the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6006value in that section.
6007@smallexample
6008@group
6009SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6010 .output @{
6011 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6012 @dots{}
6013 @}
6014@dots{} @}
6015@end group
6016@end smallexample
6017
252b5132
RH
6018@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6019@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6020This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6021scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6022section.
6023
2d20f7bf
JJ
6024@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6025@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6026This is equivalent to either
6027@smallexample
6028(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6029@end smallexample
6030or
6031@smallexample
6032(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
6033@end smallexample
6034@noindent
6035depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6036for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6037@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6038If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6039memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6040bytes in the on-disk file.
6041
6042This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6043any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6044@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
6045be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
6046working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
6047
6048@noindent
6049Example:
6050@smallexample
6051 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6052@end smallexample
6053
6054@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6055@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6056This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6057evaluation purposes.
6058
6059@smallexample
6060 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6061@end smallexample
6062
a4f5ad88
JJ
6063@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6064@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6065This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
eec2f3ed 6066@samp{-z relro} option is used.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6067When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6068does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
6069@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
6070boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
6071it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
eec2f3ed
AM
6072@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6073padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6074section alignment.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6075
6076@smallexample
6077 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6078@end smallexample
6079
252b5132
RH
6080@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6081@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6082@cindex symbol defaults
6083Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
6084defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6085return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
6086default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6087shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6088the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6089existed, its value is preserved:
6090
6091@smallexample
6092@group
6093SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6094 .text : @{
6095 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6096 @dots{}
6097 @}
6098 @dots{}
6099@}
6100@end group
6101@end smallexample
6102
3ec57632
NC
6103@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6104@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6105Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6106
252b5132
RH
6107@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6108@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6109@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 6110Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
6111Section LMA}).
6112
2e53f7d6
NC
6113@item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6114@kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6115Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6116@code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6117
252b5132
RH
6118@kindex MAX
6119@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6120Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6121
6122@kindex MIN
6123@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6124Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6125
6126@item NEXT(@var{exp})
6127@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6128@cindex unallocated address, next
6129Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6130This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6131use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6132output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6133
3ec57632
NC
6134@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6135@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6136Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6137
ba916c8a
MM
6138@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6139@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6140Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
c5da8c7d
NC
6141value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6142@samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6143will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6144can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 6145``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
6146name.
6147
252b5132
RH
6148@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6149@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6150@cindex section size
6151Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6152been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6153evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6154@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6155@smallexample
6156@group
6157SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6158 .output @{
6159 .start = . ;
6160 @dots{}
6161 .end = . ;
6162 @}
6163 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6164 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6165@dots{} @}
6166@end group
6167@end smallexample
6168
6169@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6170@itemx sizeof_headers
6171@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6172@cindex header size
6173Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6174information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6175this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6176choose, to facilitate paging.
6177
6178@cindex not enough room for program headers
6179@cindex program headers, not enough room
6180When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6181@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6182number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6183addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6184additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6185room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6186the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6187script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6188you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6189command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6190@end table
6191
6192@node Implicit Linker Scripts
6193@section Implicit Linker Scripts
6194@cindex implicit linker scripts
6195If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6196an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6197linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6198linker will report an error.
6199
6200An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6201
6202Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6203assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6204commands.
6205
6206Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6207at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6208read. This can affect archive searching.
6209
6210@ifset GENERIC
6211@node Machine Dependent
6212@chapter Machine Dependent Features
6213
6214@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
6215@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6216sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
6217functionality are not listed.
6218
6219@menu
36f63dca
NC
6220@ifset H8300
6221* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6222@end ifset
6223@ifset I960
6224* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
6225@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
6226@ifset M68HC11
6227* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6228@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
6229@ifset ARM
6230* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6231@end ifset
6232@ifset HPPA
6233* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6234@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
6235@ifset M68K
6236* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6237@end ifset
833794fc
MR
6238@ifset MIPS
6239* MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6240@end ifset
3c3bdf30 6241@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 6242* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 6243@end ifset
2469cfa2 6244@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 6245* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 6246@end ifset
35c08157
KLC
6247@ifset NDS32
6248* NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6249@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
6250@ifset NIOSII
6251* Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6252@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
6253@ifset POWERPC
6254* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6255@end ifset
6256@ifset POWERPC64
6257* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6258@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
6259@ifset SPU
6260* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6261@end ifset
74459f0e 6262@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 6263* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 6264@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
6265@ifset WIN32
6266* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6267@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
6268@ifset XTENSA
6269* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6270@end ifset
252b5132
RH
6271@end menu
6272@end ifset
6273
252b5132
RH
6274@ifset H8300
6275@ifclear GENERIC
6276@raisesections
6277@end ifclear
6278
6279@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 6280@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
6281
6282@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 6283For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
6284you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6285
6286@table @emph
6287@cindex relaxing on H8/300
6288@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 6289@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
6290targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6291program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6292respectively.
6293
6294@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6295@item synthesizing instructions
81f5558e 6296@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
ff5dcc92 6297@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
6298sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6299page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6300(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6301@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6302top page of memory).
1502569c 6303
81f5558e
NC
6304@command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6305indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6306displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6307the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6308@code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6309whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6310range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6311
1502569c 6312@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 6313@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 6314biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 6315which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
6316page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6317(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 6318@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
6319the top page of memory).
6320
6321@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
6322@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
632332 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
6324changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6325(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 6326@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 6327the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
6328@end table
6329
6330@ifclear GENERIC
6331@lowersections
6332@end ifclear
6333@end ifset
6334
36f63dca 6335@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 6336@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 6337@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
6338@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6339@node Renesas
6340@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 6341
c2dcd04e
NC
6342@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6343H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6344options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
6345@end ifset
6346@end ifclear
6347
6348@ifset I960
6349@ifclear GENERIC
6350@raisesections
6351@end ifclear
6352
6353@node i960
6354@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6355
6356@cindex i960 support
6357
6358You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6359specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6360family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6361incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6362linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6363libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6364search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6365
6366For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6367well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6368paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6369the names
6370
6371@smallexample
6372@group
6373try
6374libtry.a
6375tryca
6376libtryca.a
6377@end group
6378@end smallexample
6379
6380@noindent
6381The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6382two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6383
6384You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6385the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6386use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6387specifies a library.
6388
6389@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6390@cindex relaxing on i960
6391@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6392you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6393@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6394them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6395instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6396instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6397target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6398not itself call any subroutines).
6399
6400@ifclear GENERIC
6401@lowersections
6402@end ifclear
6403@end ifset
6404
6405@ifset ARM
6406@ifclear GENERIC
6407@raisesections
6408@end ifclear
6409
93fd0973
SC
6410@ifset M68HC11
6411@ifclear GENERIC
6412@raisesections
6413@end ifclear
6414
6415@node M68HC11/68HC12
6416@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6417
6418@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6419
6420@subsection Linker Relaxation
6421
6422For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6423optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6424
6425@table @emph
6426@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6427@item relaxing address modes
6428@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6429targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6430program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6431respectively.
6432
6433@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6434transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6435page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6436
6437@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6438When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6439of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6440addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6441@code{bset} instructions.
6442
6443@end table
6444
6445@subsection Trampoline Generation
6446
6447@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6448@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6449For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6450call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6451will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6452trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6453case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6454point to the function trampoline.
6455
6456@ifclear GENERIC
6457@lowersections
6458@end ifclear
6459@end ifset
6460
36f63dca 6461@node ARM
3674e28a 6462@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6463
6464@cindex ARM interworking support
6465@kindex --support-old-code
6466For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6467between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6468been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6469line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6470libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6471option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6472given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6473which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6474the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6475non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6476
6477@cindex thumb entry point
6478@cindex entry point, thumb
6479@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6480The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6481@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6482But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6483branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6484executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6485
ce11ba6c
KT
6486@cindex PE import table prefixing
6487@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6488The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6489the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
11e7fd74 6490element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
ce11ba6c
KT
6491import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6492
e489d0ae
PB
6493@cindex BE8
6494@kindex --be8
6495The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
080bb7bb
NC
6496executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
6497objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
6498option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
6499little-endian code.
e489d0ae 6500
3674e28a
PB
6501@cindex TARGET1
6502@kindex --target1-rel
6503@kindex --target1-abs
6504The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6505@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6506or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6507and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6508
6509@cindex TARGET2
6510@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6511The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6512@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6513meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6514@table @samp
6515@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6516@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6517@item abs
6518@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6519@item got-rel
6520@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6521@end table
6522
319850b4
JB
6523@cindex FIX_V4BX
6524@kindex --fix-v4bx
6525The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6526specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6527interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6528also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6529
6530In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6531linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6532@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6533
6534In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6535relocations are ignored.
6536
845b51d6
PB
6537@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6538@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6539Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6540relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6541
6542@smallexample
6543TST rM, #1
6544MOVEQ PC, rM
6545BX Rn
6546@end smallexample
6547
6548This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6549and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
11e7fd74 6550condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
845b51d6 6551
33bfe774
JB
6552@cindex USE_BLX
6553@kindex --use-blx
6554The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6555BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6556situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6557code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6558each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6559
6560This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6561specify it if you are using that target.
6562
c6dd86c6
JB
6563@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6564@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6565The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6566bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6567instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6568to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6569the support code can read the intended values.
6570
6571The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6572intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6573and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6574intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6575full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6576you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6577
6578If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6579enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6580@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6581mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6582vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6583@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6584
6585If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6586potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6587such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6588first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6589instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6590the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6591are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6592
2de70689
MGD
6593@cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6594@kindex --fix-arm1176
6595@kindex --no-fix-arm1176
9d5777a3
RM
6596The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6597in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6598are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
2de70689
MGD
6599unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6600
9d5777a3 6601Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
11e7fd74 6602Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
2de70689
MGD
6603http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6604
bf21ed78
MS
6605@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6606@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 6607The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
6608warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6609enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6610linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6611using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6612not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
6613
6614@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6615@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6616The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6617warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6618@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6619linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6620using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 6621
726150b7
NC
6622@cindex PIC_VENEER
6623@kindex --pic-veneer
6624The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6625ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6626is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6627@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6628
6629@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6630@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6631The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6632code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6633perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6634placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6635controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6636The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
11e7fd74 6637duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
726150b7
NC
6638group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6639code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6640where they should be placed.
6641
6642The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6643@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 6644placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
6645branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6646placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6647value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6648exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6649A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6650linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6651from the input sections.
6652
6653The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6654@samp{N = +1}.
6655
1a51c1a4
NC
6656Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6657only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6658otherwise.
6659
1db37fe6
YG
6660@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6661@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6662@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6663The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6664
6665The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6666
68fcca92
JW
6667@cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
6668@kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
6669@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
6670The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
6671
6672Please contact ARM for further details.
6673
1db37fe6
YG
6674@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6675@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6676@cindex Merging exidx entries
6677The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6678
6679@kindex --long-plt
6680@cindex 32-bit PLT entries
6681The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
6682which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
6683entries which only support 512Mb of code.
6684
36f63dca
NC
6685@ifclear GENERIC
6686@lowersections
6687@end ifclear
6688@end ifset
6689
6690@ifset HPPA
6691@ifclear GENERIC
6692@raisesections
6693@end ifclear
6694
6695@node HPPA ELF32
6696@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6697@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6698@kindex --multi-subspace
6699When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6700import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6701The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6702stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6703multiple sub-spaces.
6704
6705@cindex HPPA stub grouping
6706@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6707Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6708stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6709@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6710sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6711a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6712the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6713conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6714prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6715A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6716branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6717@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6718@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6719detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6720positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6721
6722Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6723single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6724create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6725large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6726
6727@ifclear GENERIC
6728@lowersections
6729@end ifclear
6730@end ifset
6731
7fb9f789
NC
6732@ifset M68K
6733@ifclear GENERIC
6734@raisesections
6735@end ifclear
6736
6737@node M68K
6738@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6739
6740@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6741@kindex --got=@var{type}
6742The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6743The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6744@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6745the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6746@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6747entries only at non-negative offsets.
6748@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6749entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6750support such GOTs.
6751@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6752output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6753file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6754files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6755
6756@ifclear GENERIC
6757@lowersections
6758@end ifclear
6759@end ifset
6760
833794fc
MR
6761@ifset MIPS
6762@ifclear GENERIC
6763@raisesections
6764@end ifclear
6765
6766@node MIPS
6767@section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6768
6769@cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
6770@kindex --insn32
6771@kindex --no-insn32
6772The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
6773microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
6774in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
6775used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
6776or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
6777including 16-bit ones where possible.
6778
6779@ifclear GENERIC
6780@lowersections
6781@end ifclear
6782@end ifset
6783
36f63dca
NC
6784@ifset MMIX
6785@ifclear GENERIC
6786@raisesections
6787@end ifclear
6788
6789@node MMIX
6790@section @code{ld} and MMIX
6791For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6792@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
6793understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6794can translate between the two formats.
6795
6796There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6797Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6798registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6799equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
6800@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6801global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
6802this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6803symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6804
7a2de473
HPN
6805Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6806@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6807The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6808of a section.
36f63dca
NC
6809
6810Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6811are left out from an mmo file.
6812
6813@ifclear GENERIC
6814@lowersections
6815@end ifclear
6816@end ifset
6817
6818@ifset MSP430
6819@ifclear GENERIC
6820@raisesections
6821@end ifclear
6822
6823@node MSP430
6824@section @code{ld} and MSP430
6825For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6826will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
6827just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6828
6829@cindex MSP430 extra sections
6830The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6831
6832@table @code
6833@item @samp{.vectors}
6834Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6835
6836@item @samp{.bootloader}
6837Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
6838in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6839
6840@item @samp{.infomem}
6841Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
6842this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6843
c0065db7 6844@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
6845This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6846in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6847
6848@item @samp{.noinit}
6849Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6850
c0065db7 6851The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
6852@end table
6853
6854@ifclear GENERIC
6855@lowersections
6856@end ifclear
6857@end ifset
6858
35c08157
KLC
6859@ifset NDS32
6860@ifclear GENERIC
6861@raisesections
6862@end ifclear
6863
6864@node NDS32
6865@section @code{ld} and NDS32
6866@kindex relaxing on NDS32
6867For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
6868relaxes objects according to these options.
6869
6870@table @code
6871@item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
6872Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
6873
6874@item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
6875Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
6876
6877@item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
6878Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
6879
6880@item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
6881Export the EX9 table after linking.
6882
6883@item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
6884Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
6885
6886@item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
6887Update the existing EX9 table.
6888
6889@item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
6890Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
6891
6892@item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
6893Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
6894
6895@item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
6896Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
6897
6898@item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
6899Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
6900@end table
6901
6902@ifclear GENERIC
6903@lowersections
6904@end ifclear
6905@end ifset
6906
78058a5e
SL
6907@ifset NIOSII
6908@ifclear GENERIC
6909@raisesections
6910@end ifclear
6911
6912@node Nios II
6913@section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6914@cindex Nios II call relaxation
6915@kindex --relax on Nios II
6916
6917Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
6918transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
6919which may result in @command{ld} giving
6920@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6921The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
6922trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
6923outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
6924trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
6925be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
6926larger than 256MB.
6927
6928The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
6929is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
6930@option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
6931locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
6932source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
6933register as a temporary.
6934
6935Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
6936relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
6937option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
6938
6939@ifclear GENERIC
6940@lowersections
6941@end ifclear
6942@end ifset
6943
2a60a7a8
AM
6944@ifset POWERPC
6945@ifclear GENERIC
6946@raisesections
6947@end ifclear
6948
6949@node PowerPC ELF32
6950@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6951@cindex PowerPC long branches
6952@kindex --relax on PowerPC
6953Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
6954displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
6955@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6956@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
6957the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
6958section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
6959section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
6960@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
6961both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
6962considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
6963
6964@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
6965@table @option
6966@cindex PowerPC PLT
6967@kindex --bss-plt
6968@item --bss-plt
6969Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
6970generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
6971the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
6972writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
6973@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
6974PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
6975compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
6976BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
6977
016687f8
AM
6978@kindex --secure-plt
6979@item --secure-plt
6980@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
6981@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
6982when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
6983layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
6984style BSS PLT.
6985
2a60a7a8
AM
6986@cindex PowerPC GOT
6987@kindex --sdata-got
6988@item --sdata-got
6989The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
6990sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
6991@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
6992section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
6993@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
6994@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
6995@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
6996@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
6997PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
6998pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
6999GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7000really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7001
7002@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7003@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7004@item --emit-stub-syms
7005This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7006symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7007
7008@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7009@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7010@item --no-tls-optimize
7011PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7012sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7013disable the optimization.
7014@end table
7015
7016@ifclear GENERIC
7017@lowersections
7018@end ifclear
7019@end ifset
7020
7021@ifset POWERPC64
7022@ifclear GENERIC
7023@raisesections
7024@end ifclear
7025
7026@node PowerPC64 ELF64
7027@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7028
7029@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7030@table @option
7031@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7032@kindex --stub-group-size
7033@item --stub-group-size
7034Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7035by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7036@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7037sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7038a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7039the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7040conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7041prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7042A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7043branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7044@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7045@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7046detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7047positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7048
7049Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7050single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7051create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7052large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7053
7054@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7055@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7056@item --emit-stub-syms
7057This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7058symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7059
7060@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7061@kindex --dotsyms
7062@kindex --no-dotsyms
7063@item --dotsyms, --no-dotsyms
7064These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7065in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7066function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7067code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7068properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7069to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7070@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7071dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7072feature.
7073
7074@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7075@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7076@item --no-tls-optimize
7077PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7078sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7079disable the optimization.
7080
7081@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7082@kindex --no-opd-optimize
7083@item --no-opd-optimize
7084PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7085corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 7086the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
7087Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7088
7089@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7090@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7091@item --non-overlapping-opd
7092Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7093@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7094the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7095entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7096
7097@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7098@kindex --no-toc-optimize
7099@item --no-toc-optimize
7100PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7101entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7102reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7103marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7104marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7105relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7106unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7107reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7108discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7109reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7110code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7111optimization.
7112
7113@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7114@kindex --no-multi-toc
7115@item --no-multi-toc
794e51c0
AM
7116If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7117@code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7118where TOC
2a60a7a8
AM
7119entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7120total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7121grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7122TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7123calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7124help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
712564K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7126Use this option to turn off this feature.
794e51c0
AM
7127
7128@cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7129@kindex --no-toc-sort
7130@item --no-toc-sort
7131By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7132happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7133placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7134with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7135referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7136@code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7137results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7138off this feature.
7139
7140@cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7141@kindex --plt-align
7142@kindex --no-plt-align
7143@item --plt-align
7144@itemx --no-plt-align
7145Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
e05fa0ba
AM
7146padded so that they don't cross a 32-byte boundary, or to the
7147specified power of two boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. Note
7148that this isn't alignment in the usual sense. By default PLT call
7149stubs are packed tightly.
794e51c0
AM
7150
7151@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7152@kindex --plt-static-chain
7153@kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7154@item --plt-static-chain
7155@itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7156Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7157chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7158chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7159
7160@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7161@kindex --plt-thread-safe
7162@kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7163@item --plt-thread-safe
7164@itemx --no-thread-safe
7165With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7166lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7167another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7168order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7169memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7170barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7171looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7172seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7173default behaviour.
2a60a7a8
AM
7174@end table
7175
7176@ifclear GENERIC
7177@lowersections
7178@end ifclear
7179@end ifset
7180
49fa1e15
AM
7181@ifset SPU
7182@ifclear GENERIC
7183@raisesections
7184@end ifclear
7185
7186@node SPU ELF
7187@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7188
7189@cindex SPU ELF options
7190@table @option
7191
7192@cindex SPU plugins
7193@kindex --plugin
7194@item --plugin
7195This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7196
7197@cindex SPU overlays
7198@kindex --no-overlays
7199@item --no-overlays
7200Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7201regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7202@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7203turns off all this special overlay handling.
7204
7205@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7206@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7207@item --emit-stub-syms
7208This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7209symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7210
7211@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7212@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7213@item --extra-overlay-stubs
7214This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7215function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7216on calls to non-overlay regions.
7217
7218@cindex SPU local store size
7219@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7220@item --local-store=lo:hi
7221@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7222the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7223range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7224
c0065db7 7225@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7226@kindex --stack-analysis
7227@item --stack-analysis
7228SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7229unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7230under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7231@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7232@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7233determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7234for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7235for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7236for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7237find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7238and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7239under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7240dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7241is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7242and calls will be given.
7243
c0065db7 7244@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7245@kindex --emit-stack-syms
7246@item --emit-stack-syms
7247This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7248in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7249These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7250functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7251functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7252such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7253The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 7254@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
7255@end table
7256
7257@ifclear GENERIC
7258@lowersections
7259@end ifclear
7260@end ifset
7261
36f63dca
NC
7262@ifset TICOFF
7263@ifclear GENERIC
7264@raisesections
7265@end ifclear
7266
7267@node TI COFF
7268@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7269@cindex TI COFF versions
7270@kindex --format=@var{version}
7271The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7272TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7273also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7274format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7275header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7276
7277@ifclear GENERIC
7278@lowersections
7279@end ifclear
7280@end ifset
7281
2ca22b03
NC
7282@ifset WIN32
7283@ifclear GENERIC
7284@raisesections
7285@end ifclear
7286
7287@node WIN32
7288@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7289
c0065db7 7290This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 7291See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 7292command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
7293
7294@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7295@cindex import libraries
7296@item import libraries
69da35b5 7297The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 7298libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
7299regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7300archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
7301support for creating such libraries provided with the
7302@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
7303
c0065db7
RM
7304@item exporting DLL symbols
7305@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
7306The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7307
7308@table @emph
7309@item using auto-export functionality
7310@cindex using auto-export functionality
7311By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7312which is controlled by the following command line options:
7313
0a5d968e
NC
7314@itemize
7315@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7316@item --exclude-symbols
7317@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 7318@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 7319@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
7320@end itemize
7321
09e2aba4
DK
7322When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7323(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7324symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7325often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7326private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
9d5777a3 7327options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
09e2aba4
DK
7328exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7329final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7330
7331If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
7332command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7333if either of the following are true:
7334
7335@itemize
7336@item A DEF file is used.
7337@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7338@end itemize
dc8465bf 7339
c0065db7
RM
7340@item using a DEF file
7341@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
7342Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7343an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7344exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7345name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 7346command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
7347
7348@example
7349gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7350@end example
7351
0a5d968e
NC
7352Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7353@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7354
dc8465bf
NC
7355Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7356
7357@example
4b5bd4e7 7358LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
7359
7360EXPORTS
7361foo
7362bar
7363_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
7364another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7365var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
7366doo = foo == foo2
7367eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 7368@end example
dc8465bf 7369
7fcab871 7370This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
7371symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7372alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7373by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7374@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
7375@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7376export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7377in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7378symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 7379
6b31ad16
DS
7380The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7381name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7382the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7383
b45619c0
NC
7384When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7385library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 7386@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 7387executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
7388
7389With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7390specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 7391non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
7392
7393If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
7394or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7395filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 7396
4b5bd4e7
DS
7397The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7398
7399@example
7400EXPORTS
7401 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7402 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 7403 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 7404@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
7405
7406Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7407@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7408@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7409@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7410Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
7411@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7412string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
7413
7414The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7415
7416@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7417will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7418by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7419linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7420library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7421
7422@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7423The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7424the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7425@code{*_imp__foo}).
7426
7427@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7428well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7429read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7430variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7431the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7432extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7433application will behave unexpectedly.
7434
7435@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7436it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7437symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7438API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7439the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 7440
4b5bd4e7
DS
7441See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7442other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
7443
7444@cindex creating a DEF file
7445While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7446with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
7447
7448@item Using decorations
7449@cindex Using decorations
7450Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7451itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7452declared as:
7453
7454@example
7455__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7456__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7457@end example
7458
7459All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7460any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7461this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7462the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7463
7464Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 7465decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
7466instead:
7467
7468@example
7469__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7470__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7471@end example
7472
c0065db7
RM
7473This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7474when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
7475variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7476code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 7477of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
7478omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7479@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 7480information.
c0065db7 7481@end table
dc8465bf 7482
2ca22b03
NC
7483@cindex automatic data imports
7484@item automatic data imports
7485The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 7486by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 7487compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 7488issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 7489code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 7490c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 7491initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 7492decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 7493platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
7494command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7495The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7496suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7497trigger the feature's use.
7498
c0065db7 7499auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
7500additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7501
c0065db7 7502"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
7503documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7504
c0065db7
RM
7505The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7506occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7507One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
7508below.
7509
7510@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
7511For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7512object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7513offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7514field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7515in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 7516without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 7517The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
7518references.
7519
c0065db7
RM
7520The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7521be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7522themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7523runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7524compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7525support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
7526run without error on an older system.
7527
c0065db7
RM
7528@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7529enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
7530
7531@cindex direct linking to a dll
7532@item direct linking to a dll
7533The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7534including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 7535libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 7536traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
7537libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7538function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7539though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 7540storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 7541tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
7542large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7543
c0065db7 7544Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 7545@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 7546of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
7547perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7548select the dll instead of an import library.
7549
2ca22b03 7550
69da35b5
NC
7551For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7552to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
7553
7554@example
45e948fe
NC
7555libxxx.dll.a
7556xxx.dll.a
7557libxxx.a
7558xxx.lib
69da35b5 7559cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
7560libxxx.dll
7561xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
7562@end example
7563
69da35b5
NC
7564before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7565
c0065db7
RM
7566(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7567where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7568@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7569file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
7570@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7571
c0065db7
RM
7572Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7573@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
7574was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7575various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7576could coexist on the same machine.
7577
2ca22b03
NC
7578The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7579applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 7580libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
7581
7582@example
7583bin/
7584 cygxxx.dll
7585lib/
7586 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 7587 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
7588@end example
7589
c0065db7
RM
7590Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7591done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
7592
75931. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7594@example
7595gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7596@end example
2ca22b03 7597
69da35b5
NC
7598However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7599(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7600@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
7601not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7602
2ca22b03
NC
76032. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7604directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
7605should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7606making the app/dll.
7607
7608@example
7609ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 7610@end example
2ca22b03
NC
7611
7612Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7613
7614@example
7615gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7616@end example
69da35b5
NC
7617
7618This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
7619perfectly legal
7620
7621@example
7622bin/
7623 cygxxx-5.dll
7624lib/
c0065db7 7625 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
7626@end example
7627
dc8465bf 7628Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
7629even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
7630@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
7631
7632Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 7633wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
7634
76351. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
7636work with auto-imported data.
7637
dc8465bf
NC
76382. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
7639import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
7640symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
7641for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
7642possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 7643
45e948fe
NC
76443. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
7645critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
7646in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
7647stdcall-decorated assembly names.
7648
69da35b5 7649So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
7650true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
7651a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
7652binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
7653massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
7654requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
7655will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 7656
c0065db7 7657@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 7658@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7659@item adding additional names
7660Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
7661A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
7662exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
7663when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 7664import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 7665
c0065db7 7666@example
dc8465bf
NC
7667LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7668
7669EXPORTS
c0065db7 7670foo
dc8465bf 7671_foo = foo
c0065db7 7672@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7673
7674The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
7675
7676Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
7677source code using the "weak" attribute:
7678
c0065db7
RM
7679@example
7680void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 7681void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 7682@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7683
7684See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
7685symbols.
7686
7687@item renaming symbols
7688Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 7689kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
7690@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
7691DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 7692created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 7693
c0065db7 7694@example
dc8465bf
NC
7695LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7696
7697EXPORTS
7698_foo = foo
c0065db7 7699@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7700
7701The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
7702@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 7703@end table
dc8465bf 7704
0a5d968e 7705Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 7706unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 7707If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
7708@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
7709that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
7710@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
7711renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
7712to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
7713the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
7714In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 7715which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
7716
7717@cindex weak externals
7718@item weak externals
7719The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
7720weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
7721defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
7722are three variants of weak externals:
7723@itemize
7724@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
7725called lazy externals.
7726@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
7727This form is not presently implemented.
7728@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
7729implemented.
7730@end itemize
7731As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
7732are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
7733uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
7734
7735@cindex aligned common symbols
7736@item aligned common symbols
7737As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
7738desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
7739the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
7740carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
7741by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
7742tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
7743but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
7744warnings about unknown linker directives.
5063daf7 7745
2ca22b03
NC
7746@end table
7747
7748@ifclear GENERIC
7749@lowersections
7750@end ifclear
7751@end ifset
7752
e0001a05
NC
7753@ifset XTENSA
7754@ifclear GENERIC
7755@raisesections
7756@end ifclear
7757
7758@node Xtensa
7759@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
7760
7761@cindex Xtensa processors
7762The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
7763@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
7764specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
7765keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
7766example, with the command:
7767
7768@smallexample
7769SECTIONS
7770@{
7771 .text : @{
7772 *(.literal .text)
7773 @}
7774@}
7775@end smallexample
7776
7777@noindent
7778@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
7779and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
7780literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
7781interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
7782group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
7783files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
7784and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 7785
43cd72b9 7786@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 7787@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
7788Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
7789provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
7790is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
7791literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
7792will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
7793location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
7794the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
7795unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
7796@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
7797range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
7798
7799For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
7800to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
7801instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
7802instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
7803instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
7804@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
7805hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
7806By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
7807switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
7808density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
7809instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
7810performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
7811linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
7812a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
7813
7814The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
7815control the linker:
7816
7817@cindex Xtensa options
7818@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
7819@item --size-opt
7820When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
7821more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
7822no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
7823alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
7824preserve the correctness of the code.
7825@end table
e0001a05
NC
7826
7827@ifclear GENERIC
7828@lowersections
7829@end ifclear
7830@end ifset
7831
252b5132
RH
7832@ifclear SingleFormat
7833@node BFD
7834@chapter BFD
7835
7836@cindex back end
7837@cindex object file management
7838@cindex object formats available
7839@kindex objdump -i
7840The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
7841These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
7842object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
7843format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
7844it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
7845associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
7846object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
7847(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
7848list all the formats available for your configuration.
7849
7850@cindex BFD requirements
7851@cindex requirements for BFD
7852As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
7853several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
7854BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
7855formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
7856been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
7857BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
7858may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
7859
7860One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
7861mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
7862useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
7863conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
7864
7865@menu
7866* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
7867@end menu
7868
7869@node BFD outline
36f63dca 7870@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
7871@cindex opening object files
7872@include bfdsumm.texi
7873@end ifclear
7874
7875@node Reporting Bugs
7876@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
7877@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
7878@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 7879
ff5dcc92 7880Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
7881
7882Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
7883it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 7884to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 7885work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 7886@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7887
7888In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7889information that enables us to fix the bug.
7890
7891@menu
7892* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7893* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7894@end menu
7895
7896@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 7897@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
7898@cindex bug criteria
7899
7900If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7901
7902@itemize @bullet
7903@cindex fatal signal
7904@cindex linker crash
7905@cindex crash of linker
7906@item
7907If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 7908@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
7909
7910@cindex error on valid input
7911@item
ff5dcc92 7912If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
7913
7914@cindex invalid input
7915@item
ff5dcc92 7916If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
7917may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
7918object files are correct.
7919
7920@item
7921If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 7922improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
7923@end itemize
7924
7925@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 7926@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 7927@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 7928@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
7929
7930A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 7931products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
7932recommend you contact that organization first.
7933
7934You can find contact information for many support companies and
7935individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7936distribution.
7937
ad22bfe8 7938@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 7939Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
7940@value{BUGURL}.
7941@end ifset
252b5132
RH
7942
7943The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7944@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7945fact or leave it out, state it!
7946
7947Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
7948problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
7949assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
7950matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
7951the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
7952location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
7953were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
7954into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
7955specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 7956and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
7957
7958Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
7959the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
7960on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
7961
7962Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
7963bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7964respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7965You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
7966
7967To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7968
7969@itemize @bullet
7970@item
ff5dcc92 7971The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
7972the @samp{--version} argument.
7973
7974Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 7975the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7976
7977@item
ff5dcc92 7978Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
7979patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
7980
7981@item
7982The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7983version number.
7984
7985@item
ff5dcc92 7986What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
7987``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7988
7989@item
7990The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
7991observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
7992list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
7993sufficient.
7994
7995If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7996and then we might not encounter the bug.
7997
7998@item
7999A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
8000bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8001provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8002bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8003state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8004requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8005we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8006attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
8007
8008If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8009@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8010object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8011@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8012how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8013
8014@item
8015A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8016incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8017
ff5dcc92 8018Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
8019will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8020not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8021a chance to make a mistake.
8022
8023Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8024say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 8025copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
8026C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8027and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8028fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8029you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8030any conclusion from our observations.
8031
8032@item
ff5dcc92 8033If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
8034diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8035@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 8036If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
8037context, not by line number.
8038
8039The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8040sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8041@end itemize
8042
8043Here are some things that are not necessary:
8044
8045@itemize @bullet
8046@item
8047A description of the envelope of the bug.
8048
8049Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8050which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8051changes will not affect it.
8052
8053This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8054will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8055with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8056We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8057
8058Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8059of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8060output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8061less time, and so on.
8062
8063However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8064report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8065
8066@item
8067A patch for the bug.
8068
8069A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8070the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8071a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8072to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8073
ff5dcc92 8074Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
8075construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8076through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8077able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8078fixed.
8079
8080And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8081patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8082help us to understand.
8083
8084@item
8085A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8086
8087Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8088things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8089@end itemize
8090
8091@node MRI
8092@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8093@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
8094To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8095linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
8096alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8097described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8098simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 8099@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
8100linker commands; these commands are described here.
8101
8102In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8103file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8104features to make use of them.
8105
8106You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8107@samp{-c} command-line option.
8108
8109Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8110command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8111blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 8112MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8113issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8114
8115Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8116
8117You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8118lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8119The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8120
8121@table @code
8122@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8123@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8124@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8125Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
8126the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8127@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8128your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8129script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8130commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8131input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8132@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8133
8134@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8135@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8136Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8137in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8138
8139@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8140
8141@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8142@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8143Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8144@var{expression} should be a power of two.
8145
8146@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8147@item BASE @var{expression}
8148Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8149absolute addresses) in the output file.
8150
8151@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8152@item CHIP @var{expression}
8153@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8154This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8155
8156@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8157@item END
8158This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8159
8160@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8161@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8162Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 8163language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
8164
8165@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 8166@item
252b5132
RH
8167S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8168
8169@item
8170IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
8171
8172@item
8173COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
8174@samp{COFF}
8175@end enumerate
8176
8177@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8178@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8179Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 8180@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
8181
8182The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8183same line, with no change in its effect.
8184
8185@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8186@item LOAD @var{filename}
8187@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8188Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 8189same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8190command line.
8191
8192@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8193@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 8194@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
8195MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8196option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8197
8198@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8199@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8200@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8201Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
8202order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8203script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8204sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8205file, in the order specified.
8206
8207@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8208@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8209@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8210@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8211Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8212@var{name} used in the linker input files.
8213
8214@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8215@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8216@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8217@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8218You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8219specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8220If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8221@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8222@end table
8223
793c5807
NC
8224@node GNU Free Documentation License
8225@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 8226@include fdl.texi
704c465c 8227
370b66a1
CD
8228@node LD Index
8229@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
8230
8231@printindex cp
8232
8233@tex
7ca01ed9 8234% I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
252b5132
RH
8235% meantime:
8236\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8237\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8238\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8239\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8240\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8241\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8242\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8243\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8244\page\colophon
7ca01ed9 8245% Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
252b5132
RH
8246@end tex
8247
252b5132 8248@bye
This page took 1.202435 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.